The historie of the great and mightie kingdome of China, and the situation thereof togither with the great riches, huge citties, politike gouernement, and rare inuentions in the same. Translated out of Spanish by R. Parke.

The second part of the histo∣rie of the mightie kingdome of China, that is deuided into three parts.

• The first containeth such thinges as the fathers, frier Mar∣tin de Herrada prouinciall of the order of Saint Augu∣stine in the Ilands Phlipinas, and his companion fryer Geronimo Martin, and other soldiers that went with them, did see and had intelligence of in that kingdom.
• The second containeth the miraculous voiage that was made by frier Pedro de Alfaro of the order of S. Fran∣cis, and his companions vnto the said kingdome.
• The third containeth a breefe declaration by the said fri∣er, and of frier Martin Ignacio, that went out of Spaine vnto China, and returned into Spaine againe by the Orientall India, after that he had compassed the world. Wherein is contained many notable things that hee did see and had intelligence of in the voiage.

(Book 2)

The Argument of the first part.

Wherein is declared the cause that moued Frier Martin de Herrada, and Frier Geronimo Martin, and such souldi∣ers as went in their companie, for to passe from the Ilands Phillipinas, vnto the kingdome of China, in the yeare 1577 and of the entrie they made therein, and what they did see there for the space of foure monethes and sixtee••e daies that they remained: and of what they vnderstood, & of al things that happened vnto them, till they returned againe vnto the Ilands from whence they went: all the which are notable and strange.

CHAP. I. The Spaniardes departe from Mexico vnto the Ilandes Philippinas, where they had intelligence of the mightie kingdome of China.

GOuerning in the kingdom of Mexico, don Luys de Velasco, who was viceroye, and lieftenant in that place for the Catholike king don Phillip king of Spaine, was cō∣manded by his maiestie to prepare a great armie in the south sea, and to leuie ••ouldiers necessarie for the same, and to send them to discouer the Ilands of the west, those which that famous captaine Magallanes did giue notice of, when he did compasse the world in the ship called the Victorie.

The viceroy with great care and diligence did performe the kinges commandement. This fléete and armie being prepared readie (which was not without great cost) hee caused them to depart out of the port at Christmas time in the yeare of 1564. and sent for general of the same fléete and for gouernour of that countrie which they should discouer, the worthie Miguel Lo∣pez de Legaspi, who afte••warde died in the said Ilande with the title of Adelantado, a yeare after that the fathers Fryer Martin de Herrada and Fryer Geronimo Marin and their companies did enter into China.

So after that our Spaniardes hadde discouered the sayde Ilandes, and some of them populared to the vse of his Maiestie, but in especiall that of Manilla which is fiue hun∣••red leagues in circuit: in the which is situated the citie of Lu∣son, and is also called Manilla, and as the metropolitane of all the Iland, whereas the gouernours haue ordeined their place of abiding euer since the first discouery. They haue also founded in that citie a cathedrall Church, and erected a bishopricke.

And for Bishops of the same, his maiestie did ordaine the most reuerend fryer don Domingo de Salazar of the ord••r of preachers, in whom was comprehended some holinesse, good life and learning, as was requisite and necessarie for that prouince: and was consecrated in Madrid the yeare of 1579.

At this present there be thrée monasteries of religious men in that Iland, the one of the order of S. Austen, and were the first that by the cōmandement of his maiestie did enter into this I∣lands, preaching the law of the gospell, which was great profit vnto those soules, yet great trauaile vnto them, and cost many of them their liues in dooing it: the other monasterie is of barefoote Fryers of the order of S. Francis, of the prouince of S. Ioseph, who haue béene great examples, with great profit vn∣to them of those portes. The third are of the order of S. Domi∣nicke or preachers, who haue done their dutie in all things so well as the other. These thrée orders were alonely in those I∣lands for certaine yeares, till now of late time haue gone thi∣ther Iesuites, which haue bin a great aide and helpe vnto their religion.

When these Spaniardes were come vnto these Ilands, they had straightwaies notice of the mightie kingdome of China▪ as well by the relation of them of the Ilands (who tolde vnto them the maruels thereof) as also within a fewe daies after, they did sée and vnderstand, by ships that came into those ports with marchants that brought marchandise and other things of great curiositie from that kingdome, & did particularly declare the mightinesse and riches therof: all which haue béen declared vnto you in the first thrée bookes of this historie. This beeing knowen vnto the religious people of S. Austin, who at that time were alone in those Ilands: but in especiall vnto the prouinci∣all, Fryer Martin de Herrada, a man of great valour, and wel learned in all sciences: who séeing y^• great capacitie or toward∣nesse which the Chinos had more then those of the Ilandes in all things, but in especiall in their gallantnesse, discretion and wit: he straightwaies had a great desire to go thether with his fellow to preach the gospell vnto those people, of so good a capa∣citie to receiue the same: who with a pretended purpose to put it in vre & effect, he began with great care & studie to learne that language, the which he learned in few daies: & did make therof a dictionarie. Thē afterwards they did giue great intertainmēt & presents vnto the marchants that came frō China for to pro∣cure them to carie thē thether, & many other things, the which did shew their holie-zeale: yea they did offer themselues to bee slaues vnto the marchants, thinking by y^• means to enter in to

preach: but yet none of these diligences did take effect, till such time as the diuine maiestie did discouer a better way, as shalbe declared vnto you in this chapter following.

CHAP. II. A rouer of this kingdome of China called Limahon, doth make himselfe strong at the sea, and doth ouercome an other rouer of the same countrie called Vintoquiam.

THe Spaniards did enioy their new habitation of Manilla in great quietnesse, v••ide of all care of any accide••t that might disquiet thē, or any strange treasons of enimies for to offende them, for that those Ilandes were in great quietnes, and in obedience vnto the Christian king Don Phillip, and in continuall traficke with the Chinos, which séemed vnto them a sufficient securitie, for the continuance of the qui••tnesse they liued in. And againe, for that they vnderstoode that they had a law amongst them (as hath bin told you in this historie) y^t it was forbidden to make any wars out of their owne coun∣trie. But being in this security and quietnes, vnlooked for, they were beset with a mightie & great Armada or fléete of ships, by the rouer Limahon, of whose vocation th••re are cōtinually on y^• coast, the one by reason that y^e country is full of people, wher∣as of necessitie must be many idle persons: and the other & prin∣cipall occasion, by reason of the great tyranny y^t the gouernor•• doo▪ vse vnto the subiects. This Limahon came vpon thē with intent to do thē harme as you shal vnderstand. This rouer was borne in the citie of Trucheo in the prouince of Cuytan,* 1.1 which the Portingals do cal Catim. He was of mean parentage, and brought vp in his youth in liberty and vice, hee was by nature warlike and euill inclin••d. He would learne no o••cupation, but all giuen to robbe in the high waies, and became so ••xp••rt that many came vnto him and followed that trade. He made himself Captain ouer thē which were more then two thousand, & w••re so strong y^t they were feared in all that prouince where as they were. This being knowen vnto the king and to his councell, they did straight way cōmand the viceroy of the prouince wher as the rouer was, that with all the haste possible he should ga∣ther together all the garrisons of his Frontyers, to appre∣hende and take him, and if it were possible to carrye him

aliue vnto the Citie of Taybin, if not his head. The Uiceroy incontinent did gather together people necessarie and in great haste to followe him.

The which being knowen vnto Limahon the rouer, who saw, that with the people he had, he was not able to make re∣sistance against so great a number as they were, and the emi∣nent danger that was therein, he called together his compa∣nies, and went from thence vnto a port of the sea, that was a fewe leagues from that place: and did it so quickly and in such secret, that before the people that dwelt therein, could make a∣ny defence (for that they were not accustomed to any such as∣saultes, but liued in great quietnesse) they were lordes of the port and of all such ships as were there: into the which they imbarked themselues straightwaies, wayed anker and depar∣ted to the sea, whereas they thought to bee in more securitie than on the lande (as it was true.) Then hee séeing himselfe lorde of all those seas, beganne to robbe and spoyle all shippes that he could take as well strangers as of the naturall people: by which meanes in a small time hee was prouided of mari∣ners and other thinges which before hee lacked, requisite for that new occupation. He sacked, robbed and spoyled all the townes that were vpon the coast, and did verie much harme. So he finding himselfe verie strong with fortie shippes well armed, of those he had out of the port, and other that he had ta∣ken at the sea, with much people such as were without shame, their handes imbrued with robberies and killing of men, hee imagined with himselfe to attempt greater matters, and di•• put it in execution: he assaulted great townes, and did a thou∣sand cruelties: in such sort, that on all that coast whereas hee was knowen, he was much feared, yea and in other places far∣ther off, his fame was so published abroad. So he following this trade and exercise, he chanced to meete with an other roo∣uer as himselfe, called, Vintoquian, likewise naturally borne in China, who was in a port voide of any care or mistrust, whereas Limahon finding opportunitie, with greater courage did fight with the shippes of the other: that although they were thréescore ships great and small,* 1.2 and good souldiers therein, hée did ouercome them, and tooke fiue and fiftie of their ships, so that Vintoquian escaped with fiue ships. Then Limahon sée∣ing

himselfe with a fléete of nintie fiue shippes well armed and with many stout people in them, knowing that if they were ta∣ken, they should be all executed to death: they therefore setting all feare a part, gaue themselues to attempt new inuentions of euill▪ not onely in robbing of great Cities, but also in destroy∣ing of them.

CHAP. III. The king of China doth arme a fleete of shippes against the rouer Lymahon▪ who withdraweth himselfe to Tonzua∣caotican, whereas he hath notice of the Philippinas.

THe complayntes increased euerie day more and more vnto the king and his counsell, of the euils doone vnto the Chi∣nos by this rouer Lymahon. For the which commandement was giuen straightwaies vnto the Uiceroy of that prouince (whereas he vsed to execute his euill) that with great expediti∣on he might be taken (for to cut off this inconuenience,* 1.3) who in few dayes did set foorth to sea, one hundred and thirtie great shippes well appointed, with fortie thousand men in them, and one made generall ouer them all, a gentle man called Omon∣con, for to go seeke and fo••lowe this Rouer with expresse com∣mandement to apprehende o•• kill him, although to the execu∣ting of the same he put both shippes and men in danger.* 1.4

Of all this prouision, Lymahon had aduertisement by some secrete friends, who séeing that his enemies were many, and he not able to counteruaile them, neither in shippes nor men, de∣termined not to abide the comming, but to retire and depart from that coast: so in flying he came vnto an Ilande in secrete called Tonznacaotican, which was fortie leagues from the firme land, and is in the right way of nauigation to the Ilands Philippinas.

In this Iland was Lymahon retyred with his armie a cer∣taine time, and durst not returne to the firme land, for that he knew that the kinges fléete did lie vpon the coast to defende the fame. And although he did send foorth some ships a robbing, yet did they not doo any thing of importance, but rather cam•• flying away from the mightie power of the kinges. From this Ilande they did goefoorth with some of their ships robbing and

spoyling al such as they met with marchandice & other things that they carried from one Ilande to an other, and from the I∣land vnto the firme, & comming from thence amongst them all they caused to take two ships of China which came frō Manil∣la, and were bound to their owne countrie. And hauing then in their power they searched them vnder hatches, and found that they had rich things of golde, and spanish ryalles, which they had in truck of their marchandice the which they carried to the Ilandes. They informed themselues in all points of the state and fertilitie of that countrie, but in particular of the Spani∣ardes, and how many there were of thē in the citie of Manilla, who were not at that present aboue seuentie persons, for that the rest were separated in the discouering and populing of other Ilands newly found, and vnderstanding that these few did liue without any suspition of enimies and had neuer a fort nor bul∣warke, and the ordinance which they had (although it was ve∣ry good) yet was it not in order to defend themselues nor offend their enemies, hee determined to goe thither with all his fléete and people, for to destroy and kill them, and to make himselfe lorde of the saide Ilande of Manilla and other adiacent there nigh the same. And there he thought himselfe to be in securi∣tie from the power of the king, which went séeking of him. And so as he was determined, he put it in vre with as much ex∣pedition as was possible.

CHAP. IIII. This rouer Limahon goeth to the Ilands Philippinas, and commeth to the citie of Manilla.

THis Rouer Limahon determining to goe and to take the Ilands Philippinas, and to make himselfe lord and king ouer them all, but first to kill the Spaniardes, which hee thought easely to be done, for that there was so fewe. And there he pretended to liue in securitie without feare that before he had of the kings great fléete, for that it was so farre distant from the firme lande. So with this determination hee de∣parted from those Ilandes whereas hee was retyred, and went to sea, and sayling towardes the Ilandes Philippinas they passed in sight of the Ilandes of the Illocos, which had

a towne called Fernandina, which was newe founded by the Captaine Iohn de Salzedo, who at that instant was in the same for lieutenant to the gouernour. Foure leagues from the same they met with a small galley, which the said Iohn de Sal∣zedo had sent for victuals. There was in her but 25. souldiers besides y^e rouers, so that with the one & the other they were but a fewe in number, for that as they thought they did trauaile in places of great securitie, and without any suspition to m••ete e∣nemies. So soone as Limahon had discouered the galley, hee cast about towardes her, and with great ease did take her, and did burne and kill all that was in her, and pardoned one of them.

This being done, he did prosecute his voyage according vn∣to his determination, and passed alongest, but not in such se∣cret but that hee was discouered by the dwellers of the towne of Fernandina, who gaue notice thereof vnto the lieutenant of the gouernor aforesaide, as a woonder to sée so many shippes together, and a thing neuer séene before at those Ilands. Like∣wise it caused admiration vnto him, and made him to thinke and to imagine with great care what it might bee, hee sawe that they did beare with the citie of Manilla, and thought with himselfe, that so great a fléete as that was could not goe to the place which they bare in with, for any goodnesse towardes the dwellers therein, who were voide of all care, and a small number of people as aforesaid. Wherewith hee determined with himselfe with so great spéede as it was possible, to ioyne togither such Spaniards as were there, which were to y^e num∣ber of fiftie foure▪ and to depart and procure (although they did put themselues in danger of inconuenience) to get the fore∣hande of them, to aduertise them of Manilla, and to ayde and helpe them to put their artilerie in order, and all other thinges necessarie for their defence.

This determination the Captayne did put in vre verie spéedily, which was the occasion that the citie and all those that were in it, was not destroyed and slayne: yet they could not eschue all the harme, for that the ships that carried them were small, and a few rouers & not verie expert, for that the sudden∣nesse of their departure would not afforde better choice, as also they went from one place to an other procuring of victuals: all

which was the occasion that they did not come thither in such time as they desired, and as was conuenient.

This Lymahon was well prouided of prouision and al other thinges necessarie, and hauing the wind fayre, he was alwaies in the fore front, and came in the sight of Manilla vppon saint Andros eue, in the yeare 1574. whereas he came to an anker that night with all his whole fléete. And he séeing that the end of his pretence consisted in expedition before that they should be séene of those of the citie, or discouered by them on the coasts. The nightes at that time being very darke, which was a great helpe vnto them: he choose foure hundred of his best souldiers▪ such as hee was fully perswaded of their valour and stout cou∣rage, and put them in small vessels, and charged those that went with them for Captaines, to make such expedition that they might come vnto the Citie before it was day, and the first thing that they did was to set fire on the Citie, and not to let escape one man liuing therin, promising them that at the break of the day he would bewith them to giue them aide and succour if néede did require, which they did. But for that nothing is done without the will and permission of God, it went not with Limahon and his foure hundred souldiers according as he did make reckoning: for that all that night the winde was of the shoore, and the more the night came on, the more the wind en∣creased, which was such a contradiction vnto their expectation, that they could not by night disembarke themselues, although they did procure by all meanes possible by policie and force for to do it, Which of certaintie and without all doubt, if this had not b••ene (at great ease) they had brought to a conclusion their euill pretence, with the spoyle and losse of the citie and all that dwelt therein: for their pretence was for to destroy and beat it downe, as it might well appeare by the commaundement hee gaue vnto his Captaines.

CHAP. V. Limahon doth send 400. souldiers before for to burne the citie of Manilla, and they were resisted by other men.

FOr all the contradiction of the winde this same night the foure hundred Chinos did put themselues within a league

of ••he citie, vpon S. Andrewes day at eight of the clocke in the morning, whereas they left their boates and went a land, and in great haste beganne to march forwardes in battaile a raye deuided in two partes, with two hundred hargabuses afore and immediatly after them other two hundred pickemen: and by reason that they were manie and the Countrie verie plaine, they were straightwayes discouered by some of the Citie, who entered in with a great noyse, crying, arme, arme, arme, the enemies come. The which aduice did little profite, for that there was none that would beléeue them: but beléeued that it was some false larum doone by the people of the countrie for to mocke them. But in conclusion the enemies were come vnto the house of the Generall of the fielde, who was called Martin de Goyti, which was the first house in all the Citie that wayes which the enemies came. And before that the Spaniardes and souldiers that were within the Towne could bee fully perswaded the rumour to be true, the enemies had set fire vpon his house, and slewe him and all that were within, that none escaped but onely the goodwife of the house, whom they left naked and verie sore wounded, beléeuing that she had béene dead: but afterwardes shee recouered and was healed of her woundes. In the meane time that they were occupied in their first crueltie, they of the Citie were fully re∣solued of the trueth, although all of them, with this successe vnlooked for, were as people amased and from themselues: yet in the end they sounded to armour, and did prouide to saue their liues. Some souldiers went foorth vppon the sandes, but in ill order as the time did permitte, and slewe all the Chinos that they did méete, and none escaped: which was the occasion that the rest did ioyne themselues together, and put th••mselues in order to make some resistance against their enemies, who with great furie entred into the Citie, burning and destroying all before them, and crying victorie.

This is the proper resistance of the Spani••rdes when they doo finde thems••lues in such like perilles: and this was doone with such great courage,* 1.5 that it was sufficient to staye the furie of those which vnto that time had the victorie, and to make them to retyre, although there was great difference in number, betwixt the one and the other.

The Chinos in retyring lost some of their souldiers, but vn∣to the Spaniardes no great harme, and in this their defence, did notable a••tes. This being considered of the Chinos, and that their boates were farre off, for that time would not giue them place to bring them any nearer, they did resolue thēselues to leaue assault in the state that it was in, and put them selues in couert, and there to refresh themselues of the trauaile past, and afterwarde to returne with their generall Captaine Ly∣mahon, to prosecute their intent, which they thought to bee comprehended with great ease. So when they came vnto their boates to avoyde any danger that might happen, they embar∣ked themselues and retur••ed vnto their fléete whereas they left them. And not l••ng after they were departed, they might sée them rowe with great furie towardes their shippes, and when they came vnto their Captaine Limahon, they did aduertise him in particular of all that had happened, and how that by reason of the contrarie winde, they could not come thether in time as he had commanded them, and according vn∣to their desire, which was the occasio•• that they could not bring to passe their pretence, and that by reason of his absence they had referred it, till a better occasion did serue. Their Captaine did comfort them, and gaue them great thankes, for that which they had doone, promising them in short time to bring to effect their euill intent: and straight way commanded to ••eigh anker, and to enter into a port called Cabi••e, which is but two leagues from the Citie of Manilla Thither they of the citie might plainely sée them to enter.

CHAP. VI. The gouernour of Manilla purposeth himselfe to abide the assault of the Chinos, to whome they gaue the repulse: then Limahon returned and planted himselfe vppon the plaine nigh the riuer Pagansinan.

AT this time, by the order of his Ma••••••••ie was elected for Gouernour of these Ilandes Philippinas, Guido de Labaca••es, after the death of Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, who vnderstanding the great fléete and power of Lymahon the Ro∣••er, and the small resistance and defence that was in the Citie

of Manilla, with as much spéede as was possible he did call to∣gether all their Captaynes and dwellers therein: and with a generall consent they did determine to make some defence for to resist them as well as they could (for the time that the ene∣mie did remaine in the port aforesaide): for to the con••rarie the Spaniardes should loose great credite, if that they should for∣sake and leaue the towne, so long as their liues did indure. For in no other place in all the Ilandes th••re about, they cou••d haue any securitie. With this determination they put this worke in execution, and spared no person of what qualitie and degree so euer he was, but that his hande was to helpe all that was possible, the which indured two dayes & two nightes, for so long the Rouer kept his shippes and came not abrode: for these woorthie souldiers vnderstoode, that remayning with their liues their labour and trauaile would soone be eased.

In which time of their continuall labour, they made a fort with pipes and bordes filled with sande and other necessaries thereto belonging, such as the time would permit them: they put in carriages, foure excellent peeces of artilerie that were in the citie. All the which being put in order, they gathered toge∣ther all the people of the citie into that little fort, which they made by the prouidence of God our Lorde, as you may beléeue, for that it was not his pleasure that so many soules as were in those Ilands baptised and sealed with the light and knowledge of his holy faith, should returne againe to be ouercome with the deuill: out of whose power hee brought them by his infinite goodnes & mercie: neither would hee that the friendship should be lost that these Ilandes had with the mightie kingdome of China. By which meanes we may coniecture that the diuine power had ordained the remedie of saluation for all that coun∣trie. The night before the enemie did giue assault vnto the Citie, came thether the Captayne Iohn de Salzedo lieute∣nant vnto the Gouernour of the Townes of Fernandina, who as aforesayde, came with purpose to ayde and helpe the Spaniardes that were then in Manilla. Whose com∣ming, without all doubt with his companions, was the prin∣cipall remedie, as well vnto the Citie, as vnto all those that were within it: for considering that they were but fewe, and the great paines they tooke in making the last resistance,

and the labor and trauaile they had in the ordayning of the fort for their defence with other necessaries against that which was to come, ioyning therewith the feare that was amongst them of the assalt past: surely they had néede of such a succour as this was: and surely by the opinion of all men, it was a myracle of God, doone to bring them thether. So with the comming of this Captaine with his people, they all recouered newe cou∣rage, with great hope valiantly to resist their enimies: for the which incontinent they did put all thinges in good order, for that the Rouer the morning following, before the breake of the day▪ (which was the second day after hee gaue the first assalt) was with all his fléete right against the port, and did put a lande sixe hundreth souldiers, who at that instant did s••t vpon the Citie, the which at their pleasure they did sacke and burne (for that it was left alone without people, as aforesaide by the order and commaundement of the gouernour, which for their more securitie were retyred into the fort.)

So hauing fired the Citie, they did assalt the fort with great crueltie, as men fleshed with the last slaughter, thinking that their resistance was but small. But it fell not out as they did beléeue, for that all those that were within were of so vali∣ant courage, that who so euer of their enemies that were so bolde as to enter into their fort, did paye for their boldnesse with the losse of their liues. Which being séene by the Chi∣nos they did retire, hauing continued in the fight almost all the day, with the losse of two hundreth men, that were slaine in the assalt, and many other hurt, and of the Spaniardes were slaine but onely two, the one was the Ancient bea∣rer, called Samho Hortiz, and the other was the Bayliefe of the Citie called Francisco de Leon. All which being con∣sidered by Lymahon the Rouer, who being politike and wise, and sawe that it was losse of time and men, to goe forwardes with his pretence against the valiauntnesse of the Spani∣ardes, (which was cleane contrarie vnto that which had pro∣ued vnto that day) he thought it the best way to embarke him∣selfe and to set sayle, and goe vnto the porte of Cabite from whence he came. But first hee gathered togither all his dead people, and after did burie them at the Ilande aforesaid, where as he stayed two dayes for the same purpose.

That being doone, he straightwayes departed from thence and returned the same way that he came, till they ariued in a mightie riuer, fortie leagues from the Citie of Manilla, that is called Pangasinan, the which place or soyle did like him ve∣rie well, and where he thought he might be sure from them, who by the commaundement of the king went for to seeke him.

There hee determined to remayne, and to make him selfe lorde ouer all that countrie, the which hee did with little tra∣uaile, and built himselfe a fort one league within the ryuer, where as he remayned certayne dayes, receauing tribute of the inhabitants there abouts, as though he were their true and naturall lorde: and at times went foorth with his ships robbing and spoyling all that he met vpon the coast. And spred abroade that hee had taken to him selfe the Ilandes Philippinas, and howe that all the Spaniardes that were in them, were eyther slaine or fledde away: wherewith hee put all the Cities and Townes bordering there aboutes in great feare, and also how that he had setled himself vpon this mightie riuer Pangasinan, whereas they did receiue him for their lord, and so they did obey him, and paide him tribute.

CHAP. VII. The Generall of the fielde called Salzedo, doth set vppon Limahon, he doth burne his fleete, and besiege his fort three moneths, from whence this Rouer dooth escape with great industrie.

THe Gouernour vnderstanding by the Ilanders, and of those that dwelt in the Citie of Manilla, of the fame that the Rouer Limahon did publish abroad in all places where as he went, howe that he had ouerthrowen and slaine the Spaniardes: and being of them well considered, that if in time they did not preuent the same, it might be the occa∣sion of some great euill, that afterwardes they should not so easely remedie as presently they might: and those which were their friendes and subiectes in all those Ilandes, giuing cre∣dite vnto that which the Rouer declared, might be an occasi∣on that they should rebell against them, by reason that the na∣turall

people were many and they but a few: for that vnto that time they had sustained themselues onely by the fame to be in∣uincible. With this consideration they entred into counsell, and did determine to ioyne together all the people they could, and being in good order, to follow and séeke the Rouer, for that they vnderstood of necessitie he must abide and repayre himself in some place nigh there aboutes, for that he durst not goe vnto China for feare that he had of the kings fleete, and fearing that they should vse such policies as hee hath vsed, they might come on him vnwares, and destroy him as he had done others. And séeming vnto them (that although they could not destroy him altogether) yet at the least theyshould be reuenged of the harme that they had receiued, & thereby to giue to vnderstand that the fame y^t he hath giuen out of himselfe was a lie, and should be an occasion for to remaine in their old securitie, & also had in better estimation and opinion of the dwellers there abouts, as also to cause great friendship with the king of China, for that it is a∣gainst a traytor and one that hath offended him.

This determination they put in vre and effect according as the time would permit: in which time they had certaine newes howe that the Rouer was in the riuer of Pagansinan, and there did pretende to remaine. These newes were very ioy∣full vnto the Spaniardes. Then the Gouernours comman∣ded to be called together all people bordering there abouts, and to come vnto the Citie where as hee was. Likewise at that time he did giue aduice vnto such as were Lordes and Gouer∣nours of the Ilandes called Pintados, commanding them to come thither, with such shippes and people as they could spare as well Spaniardes as the naturall people of the countrie. All this was accomplished and done with great spéede, the people of the countrie came thither with great good will▪ but in especi∣all those of the Ilandes of the Pintados. After the death of Martin de Goyti, who was slaine in the first assault of the Chinos as aforesayde in the Citie of Manilla, the Gouernor did ordaine in his roome for generall of the fiel••, in the name of his maiestie, Iohn de Salzedo, who with all this people, and with those that were in the citie went foorth (leauing the gouer∣nor no more ayde thē that which was sufficient for the defence of the citie & the fort that they had new made, which was verie

s••rong) and carried in his company two hundred & fiftie spanish souldiers, & two thousand fiue hundred Indians their friends. All which went with great good will & courage, to be reuenged on the iniurie receiued, or to die in the quarrell. All which peo∣ple were embarked in small ships and two foygattes that came from the Ilandes there borderers, for that the shortnes of time would not permit them to prouide bigger shipping, neyther should they haue found thē as they would, for that at such time as the inhabitants therabouts did sée the rouer in ass••lt against the citie, they did set fire on a small galley and other bigge ships that were in the same port, and did rise against the Spaniards, beléeuing that it had not béene possible for them to escape so great and mightie a power: although since the first entrie of the Spaniardes in those Ilandes they were verie subiect. The Generall of the fielde with the people aforesaide, did depart from Manilla the thrée & twentith day of March Anno 1575, and ariued at the mouth of the riuer Pagansinan vpon tenable wednesday in the morning next following without being dis∣couered of any, for that it was doone with great aduice, as a thing that did import verie much. Then straightwaies at that instant the generall did put a lande all his people and foure péeees of artilerie, leauing the mouth of the riuer shutte vp with his shipping in chayning the one to the other, in such sort that none could enter in neyther yet goe foorth to giue a∣nie aduice vnto the Rouer of his ariuall: hee commaunded some to goe and discouer the fléete of the enimie, and the place whereas hee was fortified, and charged them verie much to doo it in such secrete sort, that they were not espied: for therein consisted all their whole worke. The Captaines did as they were commanded, and found the Rouer voyde of all care or suspition to receiue there any harme, as hee found them in the Citie of Manilla when he did assault them.

This securitie that hee thought himselfe in did proceede from the newes that hee had from his friendes at the Chi∣na, that although they did prouide to sende against him, yet could they not so quickly haue any knowledge where hee was, neyther finde out the place of his abiding: and againe hee knewe that the Spaniards of the Philippinas remained with∣out shippes, for that they had burnt them as you haue heard,

and that they had more néede to repayre themselues of their ill intreatie the yeare past, then to séeke any reuengement of their iniuries receiued.

The Generall of the fielde being fully satisfied of his negli∣gence and voide of care, and giuen to vnderstande of the secre∣test way that was to goe vnto the fort whereas the Rouer was: he commaunded the Captayne Gabriell de Ribera, that straightwayes he should depart by lande, and that vppon a suddaine, he should strike alarum vpon the enemie, with the greatest tumult that was possible. Likewise hee comman∣ded the Captaynes Pedro de Caues and Lorenso Chacon, that either of them with fortie souldiers should goe vp the riuer in small shippes and light, and to measure the time in such sort, that as well those that went by lande, as those that went by water, should at one instant come vppon the fort, and to giue alarum both together, the better to goe thorough with their pretence: and he himselfe did remaine with all the rest of the people, to watch occasion and time for to ayde and suc∣cour them if néede required. This their purpose came so well to passe, that both the one and the other came to good effect: for those that went by water, did set fire on all the fléet•• of the e∣nemie: and those that went by lande at that instant had ta∣ken and set si••s on a trench made of tymber, that Lyma∣hon had caused to bee made for the defence of his people and the fort: and with that furie they slewe more then one hun∣dreth Chinos, and tooke prisoners seuentie women which they founde in the same trench, but when that Lymahon vn∣derstoode the rumour, he tooke himselfe straightwayes to his fort which he had made for to defend himselfe from the kinges nauie, if they should happen to finde him out: and there to saue his life vpon that extremitie, he commaunded some of his souldiers to goe foorth and to skirmish with the Spaniardes who were verie wearie with the trauaile of all that day, and with the anguish of the great heate, with the burning of the ships, and the trench which was intollerable, for that they all burned together.

The Captaines séeing this, and that their people were out of order, neither could they bring them into any, for that they were also weary (although y^e general of the field did succour thē

in time, the which did profite them much) yet did they sound a retraite & did withdraw themselues with the losse of fiue Spa∣niards and thirtie of the Indians their friends, and neuer a one more hurt. Then the next day following the Generall of the fielde did bring his souldiers into a square battle, and began to march towards the fort, with courage to assalt it if occasion did serue thereunto: hee did pitch his campe within two hundreth paces of the fort, and founde that the enimie did all that night fortifie himselfe verie well, and in such sort that it was perilous to assalt him, for that he had placed vpon his fort thrée péeces of artilerie, and many bases, besides others ingins of fire worke. Seing this, & that his péeces of artilerie that hee brought were very small for to batter, and little store of munition for that they had spent all at the assalt which the rouer did giue them at Manilla, the Generall of the fielde, and the captaines conclu∣ded amongst themselues, that séeing the enimie had no ships to escape by water, neither had hee any great store of victuals for that all was burnt in the ships, it was the best and most surest way to besiege the fort, and to remaine there in quiet vntill that hunger did constraine them either to yéeld or come to some con∣clusion▪ which rather they will then to perish with hunger.

This determination was liked well of them all, although it fell out cleane contrarie vnto their expectation, for that in the space of thrée monethes that siege indured, this Limahon did so much that within the fort he made certaine small barks, and trimmed them in the best manner he coulde, wherewith in one night hee and all his people escaped, as shall bee tolde you: a thing that séemed impossible, and caused great admiration a∣mongst the Spaniards, and more for that his departure was such that he was not discouered, neither by them on the water nor on the lande. What happened in these thrée monethes, I doo not here declare, although some attempts were notable, for that my intent is to declare what was the occasion that those religious men and their consorts did enter into the kingdome of China, and to declare of that which they said they had séene: for the which I haue made relation of the comming of Limahon, and of all the rest which you haue heard.

CHAP. VIII. Omoncon captain of the king of China commeth to seeke Limahon, and doth meete with Spaniards.

IN the meane time that the siege indured at the fort, as you haue vnderstood, there went and came certaine vessels which brought victuals and other necessaries from the cittie of Manil∣la, which was but fortie leagues from the mouth of that riuer of Pagasinan, as hath béene tolde you. It happened vppon a day that a shippe of Myguel de Loarcha, wherein was Frier Martin de Herrada Prouinciall of the Augustine Friers, who was come vnto the riuer Pagansinan for to sée the Gene∣rall of the fielde, and in the same shippe returned vnto Ma∣nilla to hold Capitulo, or court in the saide Ilande and port of Buliano. Seuen leagues after they were out of the mouth of Pagasinan, they mette with a shippe of Sangleyes, who made for the port, and thinking them to bée enimies, they bore with them (hauing another shippe that followed them for their defence) and had no more in them but the saide prouinciall and fiue Spanyards besides the mariners. This shippe of Sangley séeing that hee did beare with them, woulde haue fledde, but the winde woulde not permit him, for that it was to him contrarie, which was the occasion that the two shippes where∣in the Spanyards were, for that they did both saile and rowe, in a small time came within Cannon shot. In one of the shippes there was a Chino called Sinsay, one that had béene many times at Manilla with merchandise, and was a verie friend and knowne of the Spanyards, and vnderstoode their language, who knowing that shippe to be of China, and not to be a rouer, did request our people not to shoote, neither to doo them any harme vntill such time as they were informed what they were in that same shippe.

This Sinsay went straight wayes into the fore shippes, and demaunded what they were, and from whence they came: and bing well informed, he vnderstoode that he was one of the ships of warre that was sent out by the king of China, to séeke the rouer Limahon, who leauing the rest of the fléet behinde, came forth to séeke in those Ilands to see if he coulde discouer him to

be any of them: and the better to bee informed thereof, they were bounde into the port of Buliano, from whence they came with their two shippes: from whome they woulde haue fledde, thinking they had béene some of the rouers shippes. Being fully perswaded the one of the other, they ioyned togither with great peace and friendshippe: the Spanyards straightwayes entred into their boate and went vnto the shippe of the Chinos, and carried with them the aforesaid Sinsay for to be their interpre∣ter, and ••o speake vnto the Chinos. In the saide shippe came a man of great authoritie who was called Omoncon,* 1.6 who brought a commission from their king, and shewed it vnto the Spanyards and vnto the father Prouinciall: in the which the king and his councell did pardon all those souldiers that were with Limahon, if that forthwith they would leaue him and re∣turne vnto the kings part: and likewise did promise great gifts and fauour vnto him that did either take or kill the aforesaid ro∣uer. Then did Sinsay declare vnto him of the comming of the rouer vnto the Ilands, and all that happened in the siege of the Cittie, as aforesaide: and howe they had him besieged in the riuer of Pagansinan, from whence it was not possible for him to escape.

The captain Omoncon reioyced very much of these newes, and made many signes of great content, and did embrace the Spanyards many times, and gaue other tokens wherby he di•• manifest the great pleasure he receiued, and woulde therewith straight-waies depart vnto the rest of the fléet. And for that they looked euerie day for the death or imprisonment of the rouer, the better to informe himselfe: hee determined (for that it was so nigh hand) to go and sée the Generall of the fielde in Pagansi∣nan, and carry with him Sinsay one that was knowne both of the one and the other: by whose meanes they might treate of such things that best accomplished the confirmation of the peace and friendship betwixt the Chinos & the Spaniards, as also of the death or imprisonment of Limahon. With this resolution▪ the one departed vnto Pagansinan whereas they ariued the same day, and the others vnto Manilla whether they went for victuals.

CHAP. IX. Omoncon is well receiued of the Generall of the field, and

lodged in Manilla with the gouernor, whereas they doo conclude the going of the fathers of Saint Augustine to China.

WHen that the Generall of the field vnderstood wherfore the comming of Omoncon was, hee did entertaine him with great curtesie: and after that hee had giuen him to vnderstand in what extremitie he had brought the rouer (which was a thing impossible for him to escape, except it were with wings) hee did counsell him, that for the time till hee brought his purpose to effect (which could not be long) that he would go vnto Manilla, which was not farre from thence, and there to recreate and sport himselfe with the gouernor and other Spa∣niards that were there, for that hee alone was sufficient to ac∣complish his pretēce, without the comming thither of the kings fléete, neither for to remoue out of the port whereas they were in securitie. And for his going thither he should haue a shippe of his the which did row, and was for to bring victuals and other prouision, and he shoulde go in the company of the Captaine Pedro de Chaues that was bound vnto Manilla, and promised him that within few dayes he would giue him the Rouer aliue or deade, which vnto the iudgement of all men coulde not bée long.

Omoncon considering that this offer might come well to passe, did put it straightwayes in vre, & did imbarke himselfe in the company of y^e captain, & sent his ship wherin he came alone by sea, because it was big & drew much water: the which was constrained to turne backe againe into the part from whence he went, by reason of stormie windes and wether, and was no impediment in the other with Ores, for that hee went alongst the shoore and was shrowded with the land from the force of the wind, so that in few dayes they arriued in the port of the cittie of Manilla, whereas they were well receiued and feasted of the gouernor. Omoncon remained ther certaine dayes, after the which he séeing that the siege did long endure, and that his stay∣ing might cause suspition of his death: and againe, that the whole fléete did tarrie his comming to his intelligence of the rouer, being fully perswaded and certaine that hee coulde not escape the Spaniards hand: they had him in such a straight, &

that they would without all doubt sende him vnto the king a∣liue or dead (as they promised him) hee was determined to re∣turne vnto China with the good newes that he had vnderstood, with a determinate intent, to r••turne againe and carrie the ro∣uer after that they had him prisoner. With this resolution in the end of certaine dayes he went vnto the gouernor▪ certifying him of his pretence, whereby he might giue him license to put it in execution. The gouernor did like wel of his pretence, and did promise him the same the which the generall of the fielde did offer vnto him: and which was, so soone as the rouer should be taken prisoner or slaine, to sende him vnto the king without any delay, or else to put him whereas he should be foorth com∣ming, and to giue them aduertisement to send for him, or come himselfe: and did offer him more, that for his voyage he should be prouided forthwith of all things necessarie, without lacking of any thing. Omoncon did giue him great thankes for the same, and in recompence therof did promise vnto the gouernor, for that he vnderstoode and had intelligence of the fathers of S. Augustine, that his honor, and his antecessor, and the Adelan∣••ado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, had desired many times to s••••d vnto the kingdome of China some relig••ous men, to in∣treat of the preaching of the Gospel, and to see the wonders of that kingdome, and howe that they neuer coulde put this their desire in execution, for that those Chinos which came thither although they did offer them whatsoeuer they would demand, fearing the punishment that should be executed on them accor∣ding vnto the lawes of the kingdome:* 1.7 he did promise him that he would carrie them with him vnto China, such religious men as his honour would command, and some souldiers such as would go with them: hoping with the good newes that hée carried, to runne in no daunger of the Law, neither the vizroy of Aucheo to thinke euill thereof, and for a more securitie that they should not be euill intreated, hee woulde leaue with him pledges to their content.

The gouernor reioyced verie much at this his offer, for that it was the thing that he and all those of the Ilands most desi∣red of long time since, and did straightwayes accept his offer: saying that he did clearely dis••harge him of his pledges, for that he was fully satisfied of his valor and worthines, and that hee

would not doo the thing that should not be decent vnto his per∣son and office. The gouernor being verie ioyful of these newes, did therewith sende for the prouinciall of the Augustine friers, who was elected but fewe dayes past: his name was Frier Alonso de Aluarado, a man of a sincere life, and one of them that was sent by the Emperor in the discouerie of the newe Guinea, vnto whome hee declared the offer that the Captaine Omoncon had made vnto him: whereat he reioyced so much that being an old man, hee would himselfe haue gone thither: to which the gouernor would not consent in respect of his age, and other particularities: but entred in counsel who were best to go, and to finde one that were fitte to execute that which they had pretended (which was as wée haue saide,* 1.8 to bring in and plant in that kingdome the holie Catholike faith:) they determined that there shoulde go but two religious men, by reason that at that time there was but a ••ewe of them, and two souldiers in their companie.* 1.9 The religious men shoulde bee Frier Martin de Herrada of Pamplona, who left off the dignitie of Prouinciall, and was a man of great learning and of a holy life: and for the same effect had learned the China tongue, and manie times for to put his desire in execution did offer himselfe to bee slaue vnto the merchants of China, onely for to carrie him thither: and in companie with him should go Frier Hieronimo Martin, who also was verie well learned, and of the Cittie of Mexico: the souldiers that were appointed to beare them companie, were called Pedro Sar∣miento chiefe sargeant of the Cittie of Manilla of Vilorado, and Miguel de Loarcha, both principall men, and good Chri∣stians, as was conuenient for that which they tooke in hand. These fathers did carrie them for this purpose, that if they did remaine there with the king preaching of the Gospell, then they shoulde returne with the newes thereof to giue the Go∣uernour to vnderstande of all that they had séene, and happe∣ned vnto them: and likewise vnto the king of Spaine, if néede did so require.

This offer of the captaine Omoncon, and the appointment which was made by the gouernour and the prouinciall, was knowne throughout al the Citie, and after that they had made great reioycings and feasts for the same, it was approued of all

men, that those that were named, were principall persons, as aforesaid, and were fully certified, that there should nothing be neglected of that they did commaunde them: neither let passe any occasion, for that it was that which they did all desire, but in particular, for the ••eruice and honor of God, and for the be∣nefite and profite that shoulde redowne vnto them all by the mutuall contractation betwixt the one nation & the other: and also giue the king to vnderstande of so good newes as this is. The Gouern•••• did straightwayes call those persons that were named and appointed to come before the captaine Omoncon, and tolde them what was determined: the which they did ac∣cept with great ioy, and gaue great thankes, and the gouernor in token of gratitude, did giue vnto the Captaine Omoncon in the presence of them all, a gallant chaine of golde,* 1.10 and a rich robe of crimson in graine: a thing that hee estéemed verie much, and much more estéemed in China, for that it is a thing that they haue not there. Besides this, they did ordaine a reasonable present for to sende vnto the gouernor of Chin∣cheo, he that dispatched Omoncon by the commandement of the king to go and séeke the rouer: also another present for the vizroy of the prouince of Ochian, who was at that present in the citie of Aucheo.

And for that Sinsay shoulde not finde himselfe agréeued (who was a merchant well knowne amongst them, and perhappes might bee the occasion of some ••uill and distur∣bance of their pretence) they gaue vnto him also another chaine of golde, as well for this, as also for that hee was euer a sure and perfite friend vnto the Spaniards. Then straight∣wayes by the commaundement of the Gouernor there were brought togither all such Chinos as were captiue and taken from Limahon out of the fort aforesaide, at Pagansinan, and gaue them vnto Omoncon to carrie them free with him: and gaue likewise commaundement that the Generall of the fielde, and all such Captaines and souldiers that were at the siege of the forte, shoulde giue vnto him all such as did there r••maine: binding himselfe to paye vnto the souldi∣ers, to whome they did appertaine, all whatsoeuer they should be valued to be worth: all the which being done, he comman∣ded to bee put in a redinesse all that was necessarie for the

voyage and that in ample manner, the which was doone in a short time.

CHAP. X. Omoncon departeth with certificate, in what perplexitie he left Limahon the rouer, and doth carrie with him the Fathers of S. Augustine.

THe twelfth day of Iune, in the yeare of our Lord, 1575. being sunday in the morning: the aforesaid Gouernor and all that were in the cittie did ioyne and go together vnto the monasterie of saint Augustine, where was deuout prayers made vnto the holy ghost, and after they had all of them reque∣sted of God so to direct the voyage, that it might be to the honor and glorie of his deuine maiestie, and to the saluation of the soules of that kingdome, whome lucyfer hath so long possessed, Omoncon and Synsay did take their leaue of the Gouernour, and of the rest, giuing them thankes for their good entertaine∣ment that they made them, and did promise them in recom∣pence thereof to bee alwayes their assured friends, as shall ap∣peare by his works: and to carrie them, whome he did request of his owne good will, with securitie as vnto himselfe, & that he would first suffer wrong himselfe, before any should bee doone vnto those whom he had on his charge. The Gouernor and all the rest did thankfully accept his new offer, giuing him to vn∣derstand that they were fully perswaded that his word & déede should be all one, and therewith they tooke their leaue of them and of the religious men with the two souldiers their compa∣nions, not lacking teares to be shed on both parts.

Then did they al imbarke themselues in a ship of the Ilands which was made readie for the same effect, and went out of the port in the company of another shippe with merchants of Chi∣na that were at Manilla, into the which Sinsay put himselfe with all their victuals, for to carry it vntill they came vnto the port of Buliano, whereas was the great shippe of Omoncon, wherin they should make their voyage: which was that which was forced to returne backe againe by reason of foule wether: they aryued at the same port the sunday following, for that the winde was somewhat contrarie, and had lost the shippe that

carried their victuals: but after founde her at an anker in the port, for that she was the bigger shippe and sailed better: they founde also in her, two Spanish souldiers, whom the generall of the fielde had sent from Pagansinan, for that from the place whereas he was, he did sée the saide ship to enter into the port, with commandement for to carrie them vnto him. This did cause vnto the religious men and souldiers a suspition that the generall of the fielde woulde procure to stay them vntill such time as he did sée the ende of the siege of the fort, which euerie day was looked when they would yeelde: for that they shoulde carry with them Limahon the rouer a liue or dead. Uppon the which almost euery one gaue his iudgement, that it were bet∣ter to depart without obeying his commandement, neither to take their leaue of him, but to prosecute their voyage so much desired, for they thought euerie houre of their staying to bee a whole yeare: fearing that euerie thing woulde be an impedi∣ment to disturbe their intent and purpose: but better perswa∣ding themselues, knowing the good condition and great Chri∣stianitie of the generall of the fielde, whom Frier Martin had alwayes in place of his sonne, for that he was Neuew vnto the Adelantado Legaspi, the first gouernor and discouerer of the said Philippinas whom he brought with him from Mexico be∣ing but a childe: they were agréed to go vnto him, and shewe their obedience, and to take their leaue of him and of all the rest of their friends that were in the campe. So with this determi∣nation they put their shippe into the riuer Pagansinan which was but seuen leagues from the saide port. They had not sailed thrée leagues but a contrary winde so charged them, that they were constrained to returne into the port from whence they came, and there concluded amongst themselues to send Pedro Sarmiento in the barke, wherein came the two souldiers afore∣said, for that it was little & went with Oares, they might with lesse daunger enter into the riuer of Pagansinan, rowing vnder the sho••re: and that hee in the name of them all should conferre with the generall of the field, and so take his leaue of him and of all the rest of their friends, whome they did request that they would not forget them in their prayers, to commend them vnto God to bee their aider and helper in this their pretence, so much desired of them all: and gaue him great charge to bring

with him the interpreter that they shoulde carrie with them, which was a boy of China that was baptised in Manilla, and could speake Spanish very well: he was named Gernando. This Pedro Sarmiento came thither, and did accomplish all that was commended vnto him verie faithfully: but the Ge∣nerall of the field was not therewith satisfied, neither the Cap∣taines and souldiers that were with him, for that the father fri∣ers were very wel beloued of them, for they deserued it: so they d••termined to send for them, and to request them to come thi∣ther and sée them being so nigh as they we••e. They being vn∣derstood by the Friers (not without the suspition aforesaid) and séeing that they could not excuse to go vnto them to accomplish their commandement and gentle request: they departed out of Buliano with a faire wind, for that the storme was done, al∣though the sea was a little troubled: and therewith they ariued at Pagansinan whereas they were well receiued of the gene∣rall of the fielde, and of all the rest with great ioy and pleasure. Their suspition fell out cleane contrarie as they thought, for that the Generall of the fielde woulde not stay them, but did dispatch them with al spéede possible, and did deliuer vnto them at the instant all such captiues as the gouernour had comman∣ded, and the souldiers that had them did with a verie good will deliuer them, séeing to what intent it did extende, and also the interpreter with all other thinges that was necessarie and re∣quisite for the voyage: and writ a letter vnto Omoncon who remained in Buliano, that hée woulde fauour and cherish them as he did not thinke to the contrarie: and did ratifie that which the gouernour had promised him, for to send the rouer aliue or deade, after they had ended their siege by one meanes or other. He also requested of Frier Martin de Herrada that hee would carrie with him one Nicholas de Cuenca a souldier of his company for to buy for him certaine things in China, who did accept the same with a verie good wil, and promised to intreat him as one of his owne, and haue him in as great regard: and therewith they departed and w••nt vnto the port of Buliano from whence they came, taking their leaue of the general of the field, and of all the rest of the campe, with no lesse ••••ares then when they departed from Manilla. He sent to beare them com∣pany til they came vnto the port, the sergeant maior, who caried

with him a letter vnto the captaine Omoncon, and a present of victuals and other things: and other two letters, the one for the gouernor of Chincheo and the other for the vizroy of the prouince of Ochian, wherein he doth giue them to vnderstand how that he hath burnt al the fléete of Limahon, and slaine ma∣ny of his companions, and howe that he hath besieged him so straightly that it is not possible for him to escape, neither indure long without yéelding of himself: and then either aliue or dead he would send him, as the gouernor of Manilla had writ & pro∣mised. These two letters were accompanied with two presents wherein was a basen and an ewre of siluer, and certaine robes of spani••h cloth, the which the Chinos doo estéeme very much, as also other things of great valew that they haue not in their country: & crauing pardon because he did not send more. The occasion was for that he was in that place, and all his goods in the cittie of Manilla. The same day with a faire winde they came vnto the port Buliano, whereas they founde Omoncon abiding their comming, and receiued all such things as the ser∣geant maior did carrie him in the name of the generall of the field, and rendred vnto him great thanks, and made a new pro∣mise to accomplish that offer made vnto the gouernor.

CHAP. XI. The Spaniards do depart with the captain Omoncon from the port of Buliano, and ariue at the firme lande of China.

THe desire was so much of this father frier Martin de Her∣rada to be in China, as well for to preach in it the holy go∣spel, as also for to sée the wonders that haue béene reported to be in that countrie: that although he was dispatched by the gouernor and generall of the fielde, yet hee thought that their voyage would be interrupted: and therefore to see himselfe frée from this feare and suspition, so soone as he came vnto the port of Buliano to the captaine Omoncon, hee requested him with great vehemencie, that he would straightwayes set saile, for that the winde serued well for their purpose. Then O∣moncon, who desired no other thing, but thought euery houre that he tarried to be a whole yeare, commanded forthwith the

mariners to make all thinges in a redinesse to set saile, and to bring home all their ankers, and ride apicke, r••die to depart af∣ter midnight: the which was done as hee had commanded. So vppon a sunday at the breake of day, being 25. of Iune, they tooke a Spaniard souldier into their company, who was called Iohn de Triana, and vsed him in their seruice, for that hee was a mariner. So at the same time after they had praied vnto God to direct their voyage,* 1.11 they set saile with a prosperous winde: there was with the Friers, souldiers and men of seruice, twen∣tie persons besides the Chinos that were captiues, and the people of the Captaine Omoncon. They were not so soone off from the coste, but the winde abated and they remained becal∣med certaine dayes: but afterwards they had a lustie gale, that carried them forwards. The Chino•• doo gouerne their ships by a compasse deuided into twelue partes,* 1.12 and doo vse no sea cardes, but a briefe description or Ruter wherewith they doo nauigate or saile: and commonly for the most part they neuer go out of the sight of land. They maruelled very much when that it was told them, that comming from Mexico vnto Phi∣lippinas, they were thrée monethes at the sea and neuer sawe land. So it pleased God, that although it was verie calme and little winde stirring, that we made but little way, yet vpon the sunday following, which was the thirde of Iuly, we had sight of the land of China: so that we found all our voyage from the port of Buliano, from whence we departed, vnto the firme land to be one hundred and fortie leagues, & twenty leagues before they came in the sight thereof, they had sounding at thrée score and tenne, and fourscore fathome, and so waxed lesse and lesse vntill they came to the lande: which is the best and surest to∣ken they haue to be nigh the land. In al the time of their voiage the Captain Omoncon with his companie shewed such great curtesie and friendship to our men, as though they had béene the owners of the saide ship: and at such time as they did imbarke thēselues he gaue his own cabin y^t was in the sterne to y^e friers, and vnto Pedro Sarmiento and to Miguel de Loarcha, he gaue another cabin that was very good, & cōmanded his company in the ship that they should respect them more then himselfe: the which was in such sort, that on a day at the beginning of their voyage, the fathers founde them making of sacrifice vnto

their Idols, and told them that all which they did was a kinde of mockage, and that they shoulde worshippe but onely one God: and willed them to doo so no more. Who onely in respect of them did leaue it off, and not vse it after in all the voyage: whereas before they did vse it euerie day manie times.* 1.13 Besides this, they woulde worshippe the images that the Friers did carrie with them, and knéele vpon their knées with great shew of deuotion: who nowe hauing sight of the firme lande, in so short time, and passed that small gulfe so quietly, which was wont to bee verie perilous and full of stormes: they did attri∣bute it vnto the orations of the Friers, their companions and souldiers. The like curtesie was shewed vnto them by Sinsay, who was the seconde person in the shippe, and hée that did best vnderstande that Nauigation and voyage. So as they drewe nearer the land, they might discouer from the sea a verie gal∣lant and well towred Cittie, that was called Tituhul, where∣as the king hath continually in garrison tenne thousande soul∣diers, and is vnder the gouernement of the prouince of Chin∣cheo. So the next day following, wee came vnto a watch towre, which was situated vppon a rocke at the entrie into a bay, who had discouered our shippe, and knew the standart or flagge to bee the kings: and made a signe vnto seuen shippes which were on the other side of the point, which was part of a company ordeined for to kéepe and defende the cost, which were more then foure hundred. Straightwayes the Captaine of the seuen shippes came foorth to knowe what we were: and what chanced shalbe told you in this chapter following.

CHAP. XII. The Captaine Omoncon is come to the prouince of Chin∣cheo, but before he doth come vnto an anker, he dooth passe some trouble with another Captaine of the sea.

THis Captaine Omoncon, when he saw that the ships did make towards him, hee cast about his shippe and passed alongst by the watch towre, making his way towards the towne, where he was a natural subiect and nigh at hand, being but two leagues from the point: which being perceiued bythe

generall of that bay which was in a r••dinesse, who imagined by his working that it should be some shippe of euill demeanor and their enimies, without any delation hee issued forth from behind the point, with thrée ships that did row with Oares ve∣rie swift: and gaue them chase, cutting them off from their pretence: and when he came nigh vnto them, hee shot at them to make them to amaine: the which Omoncon would not doo, for that hee supposed (as afterwards hee did confesse) that hee should be some man of little estimation, and not the generall of the coste. But as he drew nigher vnto him, hee did know him by the flagge he bare on the sterne, in the foist wherein he was himselfe with his souldiers, & straightwayes caused to amaine his sailes, and tarried for him. The generall did the like, and stayed behinde, sending a boate for to bring the captaine vnto him and to declare what he was, and from whence hee came. Omoncon did forthwith imbarke himself into his boate with∣out any resistance, but rather with feare that hee should be pu∣nished for that hee did flie from him. The generall when hee saw him, did straightwayes know him, (and in that the fathers did vnderstand by signes) hée was verie glad of his comming, and gaue him good entertainment.

This generall was a goodly man of person, and was verie well apparelled, and did sit in a chaire in the sterne of his ship, the which was all couered to kéepe away the sunne: hee com∣manded the captaine Omoncon to sit downe by him vpon the hatches, without chaire or any other thing, who did obey him, although first hee did refuse it with great modestie, as not woorthie to haue that honour, which was not estéemed a little. After that he was set, he gaue him to vnderstand in effect of all his voyage and successe, and in what extremitie he left Lima∣hon, and also howe that hee carried with him the Friers and other Spaniards, which went to carrie the newes, and to in∣treate of peace with the vizroy of Aucheo: vnto whome, and vnto the gouernor of Chincheo hee carried presents, sent from the gouernor and generall of the fielde of the Ilands Philippi∣nas. When the generall had heard this relation, he comman∣ded the ••oate to returne and to bring them before him, that hée might sée what manner of men they were of person and the vse of the apparell: and likewise to satisfie himselfe of other

desires that came into his mind by that which Omoncon had saide of them. The fathers and their companions did obey the commandement, and did imbarke themselues in the boat•• (although it were with some feare) and came vnto the shippe whereas the generall receiued them with great curtesie after his fashion, and shewed them a good countenance, and to∣kens that he very much reioyced to sée them and the vse of their apparell they ware. But after a while hee commanded that they shoulde bée put vnder hatches, which was the occasion to augment the feare they conceiued when they were sent for: and the more when they saw that they were commanded to be shut vp in a cabin, with the interpreter that they brought with them.

This being done, they were in great care howe they might vnderstand the Generals pretence: and at a close doore that was before the cabin whereas they were, vppon a sudden they might sée that all those that were in the shippe did arme them∣selues in great haste, and the captaine Omoncon amongst them: then they heard bases and hargubus shot, with a great noise of people, which did verie much alter them: in such sort that they looked euery moment when they should come and cut of their heads. Whilst that our people were in this agonie and great feare, Omoncon considered of them and of the charge that he had to bring them thither: therewith he sent one of his seruants to giue them to vnderstand of all that they had heard and séene, wherewith they did quiet themselues, and put away al the feare that they had conceiued with their suddain putting downe in the cabine, and the shooting off of those péeces. The which the better to giue you to vnderstand, I will first declare vnto you the occasion (and then after the rest.) Limahon had not so soone taken his course towards the Ilands, but straight∣waies it was knowne in the kingdome of China: And the viz∣roy of Ochian by the order that he had from the roiall counsell, did command all gouernors of such cities that were nigh vnto the coast, to dispatch away shipping for to go follow and séeke him, with aduertisement that hee who did accomplish this dili∣gence with the first, shuld be very wel rewarded and estéemed, for that they feared that if the rouer shuld ioine with y^e Castillas (for so they do cal the Spaniards in that country,* 1.14 of whom they

haue had great notice) might thereby grow some great harme and inconuenience, which afterwards could not be well reme∣died: which was the occasion that they made the more haste, for that if it were possible to take him, or else to spoile his ship∣ing before that he should come vnto the said Ilands. In accom∣plishing of this commandement the gouernor of Chincheo did prouide shipping and did sende the Captaine Omoncon with them: but yet he could not prouide them of souldiers and other necessaries till certaine dayes after that he was gone foorth: so he went till hee came and met with the Spaniards, nigh vnto Buliano (as aforesaid). About the same time the general of the bay that was there to defend the cost, did dispatch another ship for to enquire and know where the rouer was, and to bring re∣lation therof, that straightwayes they might go and assalt him with all the whole armie. This ship was the fathers of Sinsay, he that was friend vnto the Castillas, who came in companie with the Friers from the Ilands (as it is said,) and he went in the said ship for Pilot: who although hee went out of the port with great spéede, yet with greater hast hee returned againe without mastes or yardes, for that they lost them in a great storme and torment that tooke them in the gulfe, whereas they thought to haue béene lost. At the same time that the Friers de∣parted from Buliano to Pagansinan, being requested to come thither by the master of the field (as aforesaid) there was in the same port a ship of China that came vnto the Ilands to traficke and being well informed of all things, as well in what extre∣mity the Spaniards had the rouer, as also of y^e going of Omon∣con, and how that he carried vnto the firme lande the foresaide Friers and their companions. The saide shippe departed in a morning very secretly, ten dayes before that Omoncon did make saile, & came to the firme land the saide ten daies before, & gaue notice thereof vnto the gouernor of all that they had vn∣derstood, as wel by relation as by sight: and how that ther came with Omoncon & the Spaniards, Sinsay, who was he that in al things touching Limahon was the dooer, & that whatsoeuer shall happen good in this relation, they ought to giue the praise and thanks vnto him, and not vnto Omoncon. This he spake for the good affection he had vnto Sinsay by way of friendship, for that he was of the same profession, a merchant.

The Gouernour of the bay being verie desirous to haue the rewarde and thankes of the king, with occasion to say that the sonne of him whom he sent to follow and séeke Limahon was the chiefe and principall meanes of that good successe. Straight wayes so soone as hee heard the newes of the shippe that ariued there tenne dayes before (as aforesaide) he commaunded sixe shippes to goe foorth of the baye to the sea, with order and com∣mission to bring the ship to an anker in the sayd bay, and not to suffer him to go into any other place: and otherwise they could not, at least wayes they would bring with them Sinsay, for that they would send him post vnto the Uiceroy, for to declare vnto him all that had passed particularly. These sixe ships came ve∣rie nigh vnto that wherein was the Generall aforesaid, at such time as our Spaniardes were with the Generall, and they ne∣uer could perceiue it, for that there were many in the baye, some going and some comming: but when that hee had disco∣uered them, then he caused our people to be put vnder hatches because they should not be séene, & commanded those that were in the shippe to arme themselues for their defence if néed requi∣red. In the meane time that they made resistance with this ship, one of the sixe ships did borde that shippe wherein came Omoncon, pretending to take her, and beléeued to doo it with great ••ase. But it happened vnto them cleane contrarie, for that the souldiers that were within did defende their ship vali∣antly. Sinsay with a very good will would haue suffered the ship wherein his father came to haue carried away the other, if the souldiers of Omoncon would haue consented therunto. They did not only misse of their purpose, but also many of them were hurt in the attempting to enter the ship: the saide ship did fall aborde there whereas was their captaine Omoncon, who at that instant did call our Spaniardes in his shippe, out of the generalles shippe whereas they were: which was dooone with such spéede, that it was accomplished before any of the other ships could come vnto them, although they did procure it. Then did Omoncon arme himselfe to the warre, for to defend him∣selfe, his ship, and all that were therein, or to die there. The Fryers and their companions when they vnderstoode the cause of their strife and fighting, partly by suspition in that they had séene, as by that which Omoncon did sende them worde, did

offer themselues vnto him, promising him to die with him i•• neede did so require, and requested him to appoint them what they should do, and they would accomplish it with a very good will. At this time all the ships were about that of Omon∣con, who was not idle, but put foorth his artilerie for their de∣fence, asking powder of the Spaniardes, for that they had lit∣tle left: the Generall did not depart from the shippe from the time that the Spaniardes went vnto him, neither did hee re∣mooue out of his chayre, although all the rest that were in the ship were armed.

At this time the Captayne of the sixe shippes of Chincheo did put himselfe in a boate and came towardes the shippe of Omoncon for to haue commoned with him, but he would not suffer them to come nigh, but shot at them, and caused them to depart against their willes, and called them all to naught from the poope of his shippe, with manie reprochfull woordes, saying that they came to steale the honour that hee with so great trauayle and perill had gotten. Then the generall sée∣ing that he could not goe thorough with his purpose hee de∣termined to leaue him, and therewith to cast about with his shippes, and returned into the port of the baye from whence they came. This brought in his shippe a sonne of Sinsay, to giue occasion vnto his father for to come vnto him, and likewise his owne father, whome they did straightwayes put in prison and his wife and mother: which is a thing common∣ly vsed in that countrie, the children to pay for their parentes▪ and to the contrarie the parents for the children.

Sinsay who feared the same, woulde not goe vnto his owne house till such time as he did carrie commandement from the Uiceroy, for to deliuer out of prison those that were put there without desert: the which was granted by the Uiceroy, with other fauours, and great honour as shall bee declared vnto you.

CHAP. XIII. Omoncon doth disembarke himselfe with our Spaniardes in the port of Tanfuso, and are verie well receiued by the Iustice, and made verie much of by the order of the In∣suanto of that prouince.

WIthin a little while after that the Captayne of the sixe shippes departed for Chincheo, Omoncon and his companie ariued at the port of Tanfuso hard by, vpon wednesday in the euening, being the fift day of Iuly. This Tanfuso is a gallant and fresh towne of foure thousand housholders, and hath continually a thousand soul∣diers in garrison, and compassed about with a great and strong wall, and the gates fortified with plates of yron, the foundati∣ons of all the houses are of lime & stone, and the walles of lime and yearth, and some of bricke: their houses within very faire∣ly wrought with great courts, their stréetes faire and brode all paued. Before that Omoncon did come vnto an anker, they sawe all the souldiers and the people of the towne were gathe∣red together vpon the rockes that were ioyning vnto the port, all armed readie vnto the battaile, amongst whom there was a principall captaine, & thrée more of his companions, that were sent him by the Gouernor of Chincheo, whom they do call in their language Insuanto, who had vnderstāding of the cōming of Omoncon & his companie by the ship (aforesaid) he sent thē thither before, that in his name should entertain them & cherish them all that was possible. When the ship entred into the port Omoncon did salute the towne with certain péeces of artilery & discharged all his hargubushes sixe times about, & therwithal tooke in their saile, and let anker fall. Then straightwaies the captaine whō the Insuanto had sent, came abord the ship, who had expresse cōmission, not to leaue the company of our people after that they were disembarked till such time as they came whereas he was, but to beare them companie, and to prouide them of all thinges necessarie: the which he did accomplish.

All these captaines and ministers of the king doo weare certaine ensignes for to be knowen from the common people, who are not permitted to weare any such, and they can not goe abroad in publike without the same, neyther will they if they might, for that by them they are obeyed and reueren∣ced, as well in the stréetes as in any other place where they come: all such generally be called Loytias, which is as much to say in our language (Gentlemen):* 1.15 the particular ensignes which they doo vse, bee broade wastes or girdles embossed after diuerse manners: some of golde and siluer, some of the

shell of a Turtuga or Turtell, and of a swéete wood, and other some of Iuerie, the higher estates hath them embrodered with pearles and precious stones, and their bunnets with two long eares, and their buskins made of satten and vnshorne veluet, as we haue declared more at large in the first thrée bookes.

Then after, so soone as they were come to an anker in the port, the Iustice did send them a license in writing for to come foorth of the shippe, as a thing necessarie, for that without it the waiters or guardes of the water side, will not suffer them to put foote a land. This licence was written vpon a borde whi∣ted, and firmed by the Iustice, whose charge it is to giue the li∣cence. Then when they came a shoore, there were the souldiers that were appointed by the Insuanto in a readinesse to beare them companie,* 1.16 and did direct and leade them vnto the kinges houses of the sayde Citie: the like hath euerie Citie almost tho∣roughout all the kingdome, & there they did lodge them. These houses are very great and very wel wrought and gallant, with faire courtes belowe, and galleries aboue: they had in them stanges or pondes of water full of fish of sundrie sortes.

The Insuanto had giuen order vnto the Iustice of Tansuso, wherein he had ordained what hee should giue them to eate▪ and all other things that should be done particularly by it selfe without lacking ofany thing, and appointed the Captaine that he with his souldiers should not depart from them not a iot, but alwaies to beare them company whethersoeuer they went, and not to depart till he had farther order from him: in accomplish∣ing whereof they remayned with them that night in the kings house. The Iustice of the citie when that he had lodged them, went himselfe in person to the waters side, and caused all their stuffe to be vnladen out of the ship, and caused it to be carried with great care and diligence vnto the Fryers, whereas they were.

The people of the citie did presse very much to sée these stran∣gers, so that with the presse as also with the great heate they were marueilously afflicted: which being perceiued by the Iu∣stice, he gaue order that they might bee eased of that trouble, & caused sergeants to kéepe the doore, and their yeomen to make resistance against the people. Yet notwithstanding, though they did not trouble them so much they ranged round about the

house, and clymed vpon the walles to procure to sée them, as a rare thing, for that they came from countries so farre off, and apparelled verie different from that they do vse, or otherwise haue séene. So when that the night was come, the Iustice of the citie did make them a banket according vnto the fashion of the countrie: and it was in this manner following.

They were carried into a hall that was verye curiously wrought, wherein were many torches and waxe candles light, and in the middest therof was set for euerie one of the guests a table by himselfe, as is the vse & fashion of that countrie,* 1.17 (which more at large shalbe de••lared) euerie table had his couering of damaske or satten very well made, the tables were gallantly painted, without any table clothes, neither do they vse any, for they haue no néede of them, for that they do eate all their vic∣tualles with two little stickes made of golde and siluer, and of a marueilous odiferous woode, and of the length of little forkes as they doo vse in Italy, with the which they doo féede them∣selues so clenly, that although their victuals be neuer so small, yet do they let nothing fall, neither foule their hands nor faces: they were set downe at these tables in verie good order, and in gallant chayres, in such sort that although they were euerie one at his table by himselfe, yet they might see and talke one with an other, they were serued with diuerse sortes of cates, and very well dressed both of flesh and fish, as gamons of ba∣con, capons, géese, whole hennes, and péeces of beefe, and at the last many little baskets full of swéete meates made of suger, and marchpanes all wrought very curiously. They gaue them wine of an indifferent colour and taste, made of the palme trée,* 1.18 (whereof there is no other vsed in all that countrie) our Spa∣niardes did vse it, as that which was made of grapes. All the time that the supper indured, there was in the hall great store of musicke of diuers instruments, whereon they played with great consort, some one time and some an other. The instru∣ments which they commonly do vse are hoybuckes, cornets, trompets, lutes, such as be vsed in Spaine, although in the fa∣shion ther is some difference. There was at this banket (which indured a great while) the captaine that was ordained for their garde, and the captaine Omoncon and Sinsay. When supper was done, they were carried into very faire chambers, wheras

were faire beddes, where they slept and eased themselues.

The next day following in the morning, was brought vn∣to them their ordinarie victualles, and that in abundance, as we••l of flesh as of fish, fruits and wine, to be dressed vnto their owne content, and according vnto their manner: they would take nothing for the same, for so they were commanded by the Insuantes. This was brought vnto them euerie day so long as they were there, and in the way when as they went vnto Chincheo. The same day ariued a Captaine of fortie ships in the same port, and so soone as hee was a shore, hee went straightwayes vnto the pallace for to sée the strangers: who being aduertised of his comming, came foorth and receiued him at the pallace gate, where as was vsed betwixt them great courtesie. The Captayne came with great maiestie, with his guarde of Souldiers and mase bearers before him, with great musicke of hoybuckes, trumpets and drommes, and two whiffelers, or typp staues, that made roome putting the people aside: also there came with him two executors of Iu∣stice or hangmen, hauing each of them in their handes a set made of canes, which is an instrument wherewith they doo whippe and punish offenders, and is so cruell that who soeuer doth receiue sixtie strokes with the same, although he be a ve∣rie stout man and strong hearted yet it will kill him, for that hee is not able to abide it. They doo beate them vppon the ••highes and calues of the legges, causing the offender or pati∣ent to lye downe vppon his breast or stomacke and commande their heades and legges to be holden. The Iudges, Captaines, and Loytias haue ordinarily these officers before them, for to beate such as will not goe out of the way when as they doo passe the stréetes, and such as will not alight from their horse, or come out of their close chayres when they doo méete with them. When this Captayne came vnto the Pallace gate, whereas the father Fryers and their companions did receiue him, he was brought on the shoulders of eight men very richly apparelled, and he in a chayre wrought of Iuorie and golde, who stayed not till they came into the inner chamber, where∣as he did a light from the chayre, and went straight vnder a cloth of estate, that was there ordinarily for the same purpose, and a table before him: there hee sate downe, and straight∣waies

arose vp, and standing he did receiue the strange guests, who did curtesie vnto him according vnto their fashion, which is to ioyne their handes together, and to stoope with them and their heads downe to the grounde: he gratified them againe, with bowing his heade a little, and that with great grauitie. Within a little while after he spake vnto them with great ma∣iestie, bidding them welcome into his kingdome, being glad of their cōming, saying that himselfe was come to sée & cherish thē for that they should receiue no discontent, as y^e proofe shal shew. These spéeches being finished, there was brought foorth certain péeces of blacke silke of twelue vares long a péece. And his offi∣cers did put on the Fryers shoulders each of them two, which was for either shoulder one, and was brought about their bo∣dies & girt therewith: the like was done in order vnto the spa∣nish souldiers and vnto Omoncon and Sinsay and to their in∣terpreter. But vnto Omoncon and Sinsay was giuen vnto ei∣ther of them a branch or nosegay made of siluer which was set vpon their heads, which is accustomable honor that is done vn∣to such as haue done some great enterprise, or such like.

After that this ceremonie was done, they played vpon the instrumentes afore sayde which came with the Captaine. In the meane time of their musicke, there was brought foorth great store of conserues, marchpanes and thinges made of suger, and excellent good wine: and so being on foot standing, hee caused them to eate, and he himselfe from the chayre whereas he sate did giue them to drinke euerie one in order, without rising vp, which is a ceremonie and token of great fauour, and of loue.

This being done, hee arose from the chayre vnder the cloth of state, and went and sate downe in that which was brought on mens backes, and with declining of his head a little he de∣parted out of the hall and out of the house, and went vnto his owne house, whereas by the counsell of Omoncon and Sinsay within an houre after they shoulde goe and visite him, the which they did: hee receiued them marueilously well and with great courtesie: who maruelled at his great ma∣iestie and authoritie, for that Omoncon and Sinsay when they did talke with him were vpon their knees, and so did al the rest: yet that which they did see afterwardes done vnto the In∣suanto and viceroy, was much more.

He gaue them againe in his owne house a gallant banket, of diuerse sortes of conserues and fruits, and excellent wine of the palme trée, and did talke and reason with them in good sort, and was more familiar than at his first visitation, demanding of them many thinges in particular, and beholding their appa∣rayle and garmentes, with showe of great content and reioy∣cing.

CHAP. XIIII. The Spaniardes depart from Tansuso to visite the Gouer∣nour of Chincheo, who awaited their comming: where they sawe notable thinges by the way.

AFter that the fathers with their companions had remay∣ned two dayes in the port of Tansuso, whereas they were marueilously well entertayned and feasted at the commaunde∣ment giuen by the Insuanto, as you haue heard, the third day they departed in the morning towardes Chincheo, whether they were commaunded to bee carried with great spéede and good intertainement.

At their going foorth of the towne they were accompanied with a great number of souldiers, both hargubushes and pikes, and before them a great noyse of trompets, drommes, and hoy∣buckes, till such time as they came vnto the riuers side, where∣as was a brygandine prouided and made readie in all pointes to carrie them vp the riuer: all the stréetes alongest whereas they went, there followed them so much people that it was in∣numerable, and all to sée them. So when they were embarked, the which was done with great speede to auoyd the presse of the people, there came vnto them the Captaine of the ••ortie ships, of whom wee made mention in the Chapter past, with thrée byrgandines, one wherein he was himselfe, and was maruey∣lously well trimmed: and in the other two were souldiers that did beare him companie. As soone as he came vnto them, hee straight wayes entred into the brygandine whereas the religi∣ous men were with three Spaniardes, and brought with him great store of conserues, and made them a gallant banket, the which did indure so long as he was with them, which was the space of rowing of two long leagues, in which time their plea∣sure

was such that they thought it but a quarter of a league. From thence he departed from them and returned, but left ma∣ny thinges behinde him for their comfort in their iourney, and made great offers, with an outward showe, that it was a griefe vnto him to depart from out of their companie.

All alongest the ryuers whereas they went, was seated with villages verie gallant and fresh, both on the one side and on the other. Some of them did content our people ve∣rie much, who asked the names howe they were called, and the Captaynes answered them and sayde, that those were vil∣lages that did not deserue the honour of a name, but when you doo come there whereas the king is, you shall see Cities, that it shall be a woorthie thing to knowe their names, the which townes haue thrée and foure thousande souldiers, such as in Europe are estéemed for reasonable Cities.

At the end of the two leagues, there whereas the Captaine did leaue the companie of our Spaniardes in the riuer, they came vnto a great baye, whereas was at an anker a fléete of more then a hundreth and fiftie shippes men of warre, whose Generall was this Captaine, whom we haue spoken of, that did beare the Fryers and the rest companie. At such time as the fléete did discouer them, they began to salute them, as well with great péeces of artilerie, as with hargubushes, and other kinde of pastimes, which commonly they do vse at such times: and that is doone by the commandement of their Generall.

At such time as they had made an ende of shooting and other pastimes, then did he take his leaue of them with the ceremo∣nie aforesaide, and went out of the brygandine whereas the Fryers were and went into his owne, which carryed him vn∣to the Admirall wherein he imbarked himselfe. Our Spani∣ardes after his departure did trauaile vp the riuer more than thrée leagues, hauing continually both on the one side and on the other verie many and faire townes, and full of people. In the ende of the thrée leagues they went a lande halfe a league from the Towne of Tangoa, whereas straightwayes all such things as they carried with them were takē vpon mens backs, and carried it vnto the towne before them, whereas they were tarying their comming, for to giue them great entertayne∣ment. At their going a shore, they founde prepared for the

two religious men little chayres to carrie them vppon mens backes, and for the souldiers and the rest of their companions, was ordayned horse. The fathers did refuse to be carried, and would haue gone a foote, for that the way was but short and pleasant, full of gréene trées, and againe for humilitie, refu∣sing to be carried in so rich chaires and vppon mens backes of so good a vocation as they séemed to be. But Omoncon and the other Captaine would not consent thereunto, saying, that it was the order giuen by the Insuanto, and that they could not by any meanes breake but performe in all points, or else to be cruelly punished for the same, I meane such captaines as had the charge for to garde & beare them companie: and that no ex∣cuse could serue thē, and againe that it was conuenient so to be done, for y^t from that time the Chinos should respect them and vnderstande that they were principall persons, for y^t they were carried vpon mens backes, as they do their Loytias. The fa∣thers obeyed their reasons, and entred into the chayres & were carried with eight men a péece, & the other their cōpanions with foure men a péece, according vnto the order giuen by the gouer∣nor. Those that carried the chaires, did it with so good a will, y^t there was striuing who should first lay hands to them. This towne of Tangoa hath thrée thousand souldiers, and is called in their language Coan: at the entring in, it hath many gardens & orchards & a stréete where through they carried the Spaniards vnto their lodging, they affirmed it to be halfe a league long, & all the stréete whereas they went, it was full of bordes & stalles where on was laide all kinde of marchandice very curious, and things to be eaten, as fresh fish & salt fish of diuers sortes, & great abundance of ••oule, and flesh of al sorts, fruits and gréene herbs in such quantitie that it was sufficient to serue such a Citie as Siuell is. The presse of people was so much in the stréets, that although there were many typstaues, & souldiers that did make way wheras they went, yet could they not passe but with great difficultie. So they were brought vnto the kings house, which was very great, marueilously wel wrought with stone & brick, and many halles, pa••lers, and chambers, but none aboue but all belowe. So soone as they were afoote, there was brought from the Captaine or Iustice of the towne, whom they doo call Ticoan, a message, bidding them welcome, & therwith a present

which was great store of capons, hens, teales, ducks, géese, flesh of four or fiue sorts, fresh fish, wine, and fruits of diuers sorts, & of so great quantitie that it was sufficient for two hundreth men. All the which they would haue giuen for a little coole aire, by reason that it was then very hoat wether, & againe the great number of people y^t came thether to sée them did augment it the more. So in the euening the two spanish souldiers wēt forth in∣to the stréets to walk abrode, & left the two Fryers within their lodging, vnto whō afterwards they did giue intelligence of all things that they had séene, which did cause great admiratiō: the wall of the towne was very brode, & wrought with lyme and stone, full of loope holes and watch towers. And as they passed through the stréetes there came foorth of a house a very honest man as it séemed, who was very well apparelled & stayed them for that in the same house there were certaine dames princi∣pall personages, that did sée them a farre off, and not content therewith, they did request them with great courtesie for to en∣ter into the house that they might the better sée thē: the which they did straightwaies accomplish, and entring in, they were brought into a court, whereas was set chayres for them to sit downe, and the Ladies were there a little frō them beholding them with great honestie and grauitie. Then a little after they sent them a banket with marchpanes and sweet meats made of sugar, which they did eate without any curiositie & dronke after the same. The banket being done, they made signes and tokens vnto thē, that they receiued great content with their sight, and that they might depart when y^t their peasure was, the which they did after y^t they had made great curtesies with thankes for their friendship receiued of both parts. So after they had taken their leaue they went to see a house of pleasure y^t was hard by y^e town wall, wrought vpon the water, with verie faire galleries & open lodges for to banket in, made of masons worke, & therin many tables finely painted, & round about it sesterns of water wherin was store of fish, & ioyning vnto thē tables of very faire alabaster, all of one stone, and the least of them was of eight spannes long: and rounde about them were brookes of run∣ning water, that gaue a pleasaunt sounde in the meane time they were banketting, and nigh thereunto many gardynes full of all sortes of flowers. And a little from that place they

sawe a bridge all of Masons worke, and the stones verie well wrought and of a mightie biggnesse, they measured some of them, that were twentie and two and twentie foote long, and fiue foote brode, and séemed vnto them that it was a thing im∣possible to be layde there by mans handes. Of this bignesse, yea and bigger they did sée layde vppon manie other bridges, in the discourse of their voyage going to Chincheo and Au∣••heo. In this towne they tarried and rested themselues all that night, marueiling verie much at that which they had seene. The next day in the morning when they were vp and readie, they found in the house all thinges in a readinesse and in verie good order, for their departure, as well their little chayres, and horse, as for men to carrie their stuffe and apparell, which did not a little make them to marueile, how that euerie one of thē with a waster vpon their shoulders, did deuide their burden in two partes, sixe roues before and sixe roues behinde, and did trauaile with the same with so great ease and swiftnes that the horse could not indure with them. They went vnto the Tico∣an his house, he who sent them the present ouer night, to giue him thankes for his courtesie, and to take their leaue of him. They found him with great maiestie, but yet gaue them great & good entertainment, and craued pardon at their hands, if that he did not giue them the entertainement and courtesie as they deserued. He did likewise put vpon each of them two péeces of silke, in the same order as the gouernour of Tansuso did. So when they had surrendred vnto him thankes, they tooke their leaue and departed from Chincheo whereas was the Insuan∣to or gouernor, by whose order was showed vnto them all the courtesie as you haue hearde.

CHAP. XV. The Spaniardes doo prosecute their iourney to Chincheo, and seeth many notable thinges by the way.

FRom this towne of Tangoa vnto Chincheo is thirteene leagues, and so plaine way that it giueth great content to trauaile it: in all the waye they could not see one spanne of ground but was tilled and occupied. The like they doo saye is of all the grounde that is in the whole kingdome: it is

full of people, and the townes one so néere to an other, that almost you can not iudge them to bee manie townes but one, for that there was but a quarter of a league distant one towne from an other, and it was tolde vnto them that in all the Prouinces of the kingdome, it is populared in the same order. All their ground they till is watered, which is the occasion of the frutefulnesse thereof, so that they doo gather fruite all the yeare long, and our Spaniardes did sée in all places whereas they came, that they were gathering of rice, some newe sprong vp, some with eares, and some rype. They doo plough and till their ground with kine, Bufalos, and bulles, which are ve∣rie tame, and although they be great, yet be their hornes but of a spanne long and turning backwards to the tayle, in such sort that they can not do any hurt or harme with them: they do go∣uerne them with a corde that is made fast to a ring that is in their nose, and in like sort do they gouerne the Bufanos. They doo féede them commonly in the fieldes of rice, for that they haue no other grasinges, and all the time that they are féeding a boy doth ride on euerie one of them to disturbe them, that they doo no harme therein. But to eate the wéedes and grasse that doo grow in the rice. In this prouince and all the rest of the fif∣téene in that kingdome, they gather much wheate, and excel∣lent good barley, péese, Borona, Millo, Frysoles, Lantesas, Chiches, and other kindes of graines and séedes, whereof is great abundance and good cheape. But the chiefest thing that they do gather and a victuall that is most vsed amongest them and the borderers there aboutes is rice.

All the hie waies are couered with the shadowe of verie faire orchardes which do garnish it verie much, and they are plan∣ted in verie good order: and amongest th••m there are shoppes, whereas is solde all manner of fruites, to the comfort of all such as doo trauaile by the way, which is an infinite number, some on foote, some on horsebacke and others in little chayres. Their waters by the hie waies are verie good and light, al∣though the wether at that time was verie hoat, especially at noone time, yet was the water of their welles and fountaynes verie coole. The same day when they had trauayled halfe way, they saw a farre off comming marching towardes them in verye good order, a squadron of souldiers, which at the first

caused them to maruaile, and to be a fraide, till such time as they drewe nigher, it was tolde vnto them, that it was the Captayne of the garde vnto the Insuanto or Gouernour of Chincheo, who came by his order to receiue them with foure hundred souldiers verie well armed with pickes and hargubu∣shes, and well apparelled. So soone as the Captaine came vnto them, he was mounted on a bay horse, but of small sta∣ture, as they for the most part bee in all that prouince, hee a∣lighted and came vnto the fathers, and his companions (who likewise did alight from their little chayres) and did salute the one the other with great courtesie. And the Captayne tolde them, how that the Gouernour did sende him with those soul∣diers for to receiue him and to beare him companie, and howe that hee was in the Citie tarrying their comming with great desire to sée them, and commaunded that with all spéede possi∣ble they should shorten the way.

The Captaine came verie well apparelled with a chayne of golde about his necke, a man of a good audacitie and vnderstan∣ding. Harde vnto his stirryp hee had a page that went with him and carried a great Tira sol,* 1.19 made of silke that did shadowe him all ouer. The bunnet that this Captaine did weare, was like vnto them that before they had séene others weare: hee had before him great musicke of trompets and hoybukes wher∣on they played in great concorde. This Captaine with his foure hundreth souldiers did continually garde them, till they came vnto the Citie of Chincheo, and neuer departed from them a iot: the which was done more for pompe, and to showe their maiestie then of necessitie: for that although the people are infinite & without number,* 1.20 yet do they weare no weapons, for that they are commanded by the lawe of the countrie to the contrarie vpon paine of death, of what state or degrée so euer he be, but onely the souldiers such as are in euerie towne for the gard thereof, and the garrisons that the king hath continually readie to come foorth when that any occasion shall serue.

In this hie way continually there went and came manye packe horses, laden with m••rchandice and other thinges, but the most parte of them were Mules. The hie wayes are ve∣rie brode, that twentie men may ride together on a ranke and one not hinder an other, and are all paued with great stones:

and they say that the wayes thoroughout all the other Prouin∣ces be in the same order, and was done by a king of that coun∣trie, who spent vpon the same a great part of his treasure. And it séemeth to be true, for that our Spaniards traueling in that countrie ouer high and mightie mountaines, yet did they finde the waies plaine, in such sort as hath béene told you.

CHAP. XVI. Our Spaniardes ariued at the Citie of Chincheo, whereas they were receiued and lodged, and what they sawe in that Citie.

VPon a Saterday being the eleuenth of Iuly came our Spaniards vnto the citie of Chincheo four houres before it was night. This citie is of the common sorte in that king∣dome, and may haue seuentie thousande housholdes. It is of great traficke and well prouided of all things,* 1.21 for that the sea is but two leagues from it: it hath a mightie riuer run∣ning alongest by it downe into the sea, by which is brought by water and carried downe all kinde of marchandice. There is a bridge ouer the sayde riuer, which is supposed to bee the fayrest that is in all the worlde: it hath a drawe bridge to serue in time of warres or for any other necessitie: the bridge is eight hundreth paces long, and all wrought with stones of two and twentie foote long, and fiue foote broade, a thing great∣ly to bee marueiled at: at the entrie thereof there were manie armed souldiers readie to fight, who when they came within hargubush shoote did salute them in verie good order. There was nigh vnto the sayde bridge in the riuer riding at an an∣ker more than a thousande shippes of all sortes,* 1.22 and so great a number of boates and barkes that all the riuer was couered, and euerie one full of people that had entred into them for to sée the Castillas, for so they did call the Spaniardes in that countrie, for the stréetes in the suburbes nor in the Citie could not hold them, the number was so great, yet their streets are as broade as our ordinarie streetes in anye Citie in all Spaine.

This Citie is compassed with a strong wall, made of stone, and is seuen fadam hie, and foure fadam broade, and vpon the

gates many towers wherein is placed their artilerie,* 1.23 which is all their strength, for that they doo not vse in their kingdome strong castels as they doo in Europe. The houses of the Citie are all built after one sorte and fashion, but faire, and not ve∣rie hie,* 1.24 by reason of the earth quakes which are ordinarily in that countrie.

All the stréetes (but especially that wherein they passed at their comming thether) haue on the one side and on the other, sheddes,* 1.25 vnder the which are shoppes, full of riche marchan∣dice and of great value and verie curious. They haue in e∣qual distance the one from the other, many triumphant arches which doo set out the stréetes verie much, and is vsed in eue∣rie principall streete thorough out all the kingdome,* 1.26 in the which they haue excellent market places, whereas is to bee bought all thinges that you will desire to be eaten, as well of fish as of fleshe, fruites, herbes, comfits, conserues, and all thinges so good cheape, that it is almost bought for nothing. Their victualles are verie good and of great substance, their hogges flesh whereon they doo féede much, is so holsome and good as the mutton in Spaine. The fruites that wee did sée, some were like vnto them we haue in Spaine, and others ne∣uer the like séene by vs afore, but of an excellent taste and sauour. But in especiall one kinde of fruite which is bigger than a muske million, but of the same fashion, but of maruel∣lous excellent and precious victuall and pleasant to be eaten, a kinde of plummes that is of a gallant taste, and neuer hurteth anie bodie although they eate neuer so manie, a thing prooued by our Spaniardes many times. The stréete that they came in at, was so full of people, that if a graine of wheate had béene throwne amongest them, it would scarce haue fallen to the grounde. And although they were carried in little chayres vp∣on mens backes, and the Captaine (of whome we speake of) before them making way: yet were they a great while before they could passe the stréete, and be brought vnto a great house, which was a couent, wherein dwelt religious men of that countrie, thether they were brought and lodged, beeing verie wearie of the presse of people that did trouble them verie much with desire to take their ease.

CHAP. XVII. The gouernor of Chincheo doth call the Spaniards before him, and sheweth vnto them the ceremonies that they must vse to haue aundience.

THe same day that they came into the cittie (as aforesaide) was a good while before night, with more desire to take rest and ease themselues of their iourney, and of the trauell they had in the stréets, by reason of the great number of people that came to sée them, then to make any visitation that night: but the Insuanto or gouernor of the cittie did send and commanded that forthwith they shoulde go vnto his house, for that hee had great desire to sée them: the which they did more for necessitie of the time, then for any good will. They went forth from their lodging on foote, whether it was for that the gouernors house was néere hande, or else peraduenture at his commandement, which they could not well vnderstande, but did as the captaine that guarded them did commande. In the midst of the stréete, wheras was no lesse number of people then in the other, wher∣by they entred into the Citie, they met with a Loytia that came to entertaine them with great maiestie, and had carried before him manie banners, mase bearers and tipstaues, and others which carried settes or whips, which they did traile after them made fast vnto long stickes, which were the executioners, the which doo go alwayes making of way, parting the people be∣fore the Loytias, as you haue hearde. The maiestie and compa∣ny wherewith he came was so great, that they verely did be∣léeue him to be the Insuanto: but being certified, they vnder∣stoode that it was one of his counsailers that came from the go∣uernors home to his owne house, which was in the same stréet whereas hee met with them. This counsailor was carried in a chaire of Iuory, garnished with gold and with curtines of cloth of golde, and on them the kings armes, which are certaine ser∣pents knotted togither (as hath béene tolde you.) But when he came right against the spaniards, without any staying he made a signe with his head, and commanded that they should returne backe againe vnto his house, which was hard by: the captains did straightways obey his commandement, and returned with

them. The counsailor entred into his house, which was verie faire, he had in it a faire court, and therein a gallant fountaine and a garden. After him entred the spaniards all alone, the rest remained without in the stréet at the Loytias commandement, he entertained them with verie good wordes of semblance, and saide in conclusion that they were welcome into that king∣dome, with many other wordes of curtesie: vnto the which they answered with the same curtesie, with signes and by their interpreter that they carried with them. This Loytia commaunded a banquet to bee brought foorth, and wine to drinke, hee began first both to eate and drinke. Then hee com∣manded to call in the captaine, vnto whome was giuen the charge to beare them companie, and did chide with him verie sharpely and seuerely, because he did carrie them on foote (they coulde not vnderstande whether it were doone for a policie, or of a trueth, although the effectes wherewith hee did chide sée∣med of a trueth) hee straightwayes commaunded two rich Chayres to bée brought foorth for to carrie the Fathers, and to giue vnto their companions horses: the which being done, he willed them to go and visite the gouernor, who did tary their comming: and that another time at more leasure he would sée and visite them.

They followed their way all alongst the stréete, which sée∣med vnto them to be more fairer then the other wherein they entered, and of more fairer houses and triumphant arkes: and also the shoppes that were on the one side and on the other, to bee better furnished with richer thinges then the others, in so ample sort, that what therewith, as also the great number of people which they sawe, they were so amased, that they were as people from themselues, thinking it to be a dreame. To con∣clude, after they had gone a good while in that stréete, de∣lighting their eies with newe thinges neuer séene of them be∣fore: they came into a great place, whereas were many soul∣diers in good order with their hargabushes, pickes and other armour in a redinesse, apparelled all in a liuerie of silke, with their ancients displayed. At the end of this place, was there a very faire and sumpteous pallace, the gate was wrought of ma∣sons worke of stone, very great & full of figures or personages, and aboue it a great window with an iron grate al guilt: they

were carried within the gates, the souldiers & the people which were without number, remained without and coulde not be a∣uoyded but with great difficultie. When they were within the first court, there came forth a man very well apparelled and of authoritie, and made signes with his hande vnto them that brought the Spaniards, that they should carrie them into a hal that was vpon the right hand, the which was straightwayes done. The hall was very great & faire, & at the end therof there was an altar, whereon was many Idols, & all did differ the one from the other in their fashion: the altar was rich and very cu∣riously trimm••d with burning lampes: the aultar cloth was of cloth of gold, and the fruntlet of the same.

After a while that they had béene there whereas the Idols were: there came a seruant from the gouernor and saide vnto them in his behalfe, that they shoulde sende vnto him the inter∣preter, for that hee woulde talke with him, and tell him some things that they ought to obserue, if they would haue any au∣dience of him: they straightwayes commanded him to go. And the gouernor said vnto him that hee should aduise the fathers and the rest of his companions, that if they would talke & treate of such businesse as they came for▪ that it must be done with the same ceremonie and respect, as the Nobles of that prouince do vse to talke with him: which is vppon their knées (as after∣wards they did sée manie times vsed) if not that they shoulde depart vnto the house whereas they were lodged, and there to tarrie the order that shoulde bee sent from the vizroy of Au∣cheo.

The Spaniards when they hearde this message, there was amongst them diuers iudgementes and opinions, striuing amongst themselues a good while, but yet in conclusion, the religious Fathers, whome the gouernour of the Ilandes had ordeined and sent as principalles in this matter, and whose iudgemente they shoulde followe, saide that they ought to accept the condition, seeing that by no other meanes they coulde not come vnto that they pretended: and not to leaue it it off for matters of small importance, for that therein they make no offence vnto GOD, and it may bee a meane vnto the conuerting of that mightie kingdome, whome the diuell maketh reckoning to bee his owne, and

not nowe to leaue it off, but rather to procure all meanes that may be, as they had begun to do, and seeing that it is no offence vnto God, as aforesaide, neither sent as ambassadors from the king of Spaine, I doo not know to the contrarie, but that wee may consent vnto the will of the Insuant, and in especiall being a thing so commonly vsed in that countrie. This opinion and iudgement was followed, although the souldiers that were with them were of a contrarie opinion: so they sent answere vnto the gouernor with the said interpreter, that they will ob∣serue their accustomed ceremonies, and will do all that he will commande them according vnto the custome of the countrie: otherwise they could not be permitted to intreat of such things, wherefore they came thither, from farre countries and with so great trauell.

CHAP. XVIII. The Spaniards haue a louing and fauorable audience of the gouernor of Chincheo, to whom they do giue the letters they brought from the Ilands Philippinas.

WHen that the Insuanto vnderstood that the spaniards woulde enter with the reuerence accustomed, and in such order as was declared vnto them, hee straightwaies com∣manded that they should come into the hall whereas he was, which was a thing to be séene, as well for the bignes, as for the riches that was in it, the which I do let passe because I would not be tedious. The spaniards were carried foorth out of that hall whereas they were first, and after that they had passed the court whereas they came in, they entred into another hall as bigge as the first: whereas were many souldiers with their weapons in their hands in verie good order, and richly apparel∣led, and next vnto them were many tipstaues and sergeants, with different ensignes or badges, all apparelled with long robes of silke, garded and embroidered with gold, and euery one of them had a helme on his heade, some of siluer and other some of tynne guilt ouer, which was a gallant thing to sée: all had long haire and dyed yealow, which hong downe behinde their eares vpon their backes: they were placed in very good order, and made a lane that the Spaniards might passe thorough:

then they came into a gallerie, which was ioyning vnto the chamber where the gouernor was, and there they heard such a noise of instruments of diuerse sorts, which indured a good while, and was of so great melodie, that it séemed vnto them that they neuer before heard the like: which caused vnto them great admiration to see so great maiestie amongst Gentiles.* 1.27 When the musicke was ended they entered into the hall afore∣said, and had not gone many steps, when as they met with the counsailer that met with them in the stréete aforesaid, and with him other two of his companions all on foote and bare headed before the gouernor, & their ensignes of maiestie left off: which is generally vsed in all the kingdome, the inferior to make anie shewe when that hee is before his superior. Then they made signes vnto them for to knéele downe, for that the Insuanto was nigh at hande in a rich tower, vnder a canapie of great ri∣ches, and did represent so great maiestie as the king himselfe: he did entertaine them with tokens of great loue, and humani∣tie, and tolde them by their interpreter, that they were verie well welcome, and that he did greatly reioyce to sée them, with many other words of great fauour. This gouernor was a man of goodly person, well fauored, and of a merrie countenance, more then any that they had séene in all that countrie. He cau∣sed to be put vpon the shoulders of the fathers and of the souldi∣ers ••hat were with him, euery one of them two péeces of silke, which was crossed about them like skarfes, and likewise to ei∣ther of them a branch of siluer: the like curtesie he did vnto the captaine Omoncon, and vnto Sinsay, and commanded to giue vnto all their seruants euery one of them a mantle of cotton painted. This ceremonie is vsed in that kingdome vnto al cap∣taines and other men that haue done some valiant exploit, (as we haue tolde you before.) This being doone, the fathers did giue vnto him the letters which they carryed from the gouer∣nor and generall of the fielde, and a note of the present that was sent him: crauing pardon for that it was so smal, but time and oportunitie would not serue as then to sende vnto him a thing of greater price and valor: certifying him, that if the friendship which they pretended did go forwards, & come to be established, that then all things should be amended and amplified. He an∣swered vnto their profers with words of great fauor, and made

signes vnto them to arise, and to go and take their rests, there whereas they were lodged: the which they did, and sounde all thinges in verie good order and well furnished, as well of beddes as of all other ne••essaries, which was done by the com∣mandement of the gouernour. Before they departed out of the pallace, the captaine of the guard did carrie them vnto his lodging, which was within the court, and there he made them a banquet with conserues, and fruits in abundance: the which being doone, hee and other Gentlemen of the pallace did beare them companie vntill they came to their lodgings, which they greatly desired, for that they were wery of their iourney, & also with the trouble of the great presse of people that pressed on thē in the stréets and otherwise for to sée them: the which captaine of the guard did appoint a company of souldiers for to gard thē both night and day, the which was done more for maiesty then for necessitie or securitie of their persons. They had a steward appointed to prouide them and all their company of all thinges necessarie, and that in abundance, and not to take of them any thing, which was giuen by particular commandement by the gouernour.

CHAP. XIX. The Spaniards are visited by the principals of Chincheo, the gouernor did send for Pedro de Sarmiento and My∣guel de loarcha, and giueth them particular audience, and doth wel informe himselfe of all things touching Li∣mahon the rouer.

THe next day following, which was sunday the twelfth of Iuly, many of the Gentlemen of the cittie did go vnto the Spaniards to visite them, vsing many ceremonies according to their custome with fauorable words, promising to performe it in déeds, when as néede did so require: and such as could not go themselues did send their seruants, bidding them welcome and to knowe of their good healthes, and howe they did like of their citties and country. The Spaniards did make answere, and gratified them all, as well those that came in person, as the other that sent their seruants: in the which visitation they spent all the whole day, hauing great admyration to sée the good be∣hauior,

nurture, and gallant demeanure of those Gentlemen, and the great discreation they had in the demanding of anie thing they would knowe, as also in their answers made to our requests. The next day the Insuanto sent a commandement wherein he willed the two fathers to remaine in their lodgings and take their case: but the two souldiers Pedro Sarmiento, and Miguel de Loarcha should come and speake with him, and that they should bring with them their interpreter, for that hée had one there with him (who was a Chino, and vnderstood the language of the Philippinas, but so badly, that they coulde not by his interpretation talke of any matter of importance. So when they came thither, they were brought whereas hee was, but with lesse ceremony then on the first day: but yet they found him with the like maiestie as before. He asked of them how the fathers did, and they themselues, and if they were refreshed of the trauell in the iourney, and howe they did like of the coun∣trie, and other thinges, which did demonstrate great aff••bili∣tie. Being by them satisfied of his demands, he requested them to declare vnto him the whole circumstance of the comming of Limahon the rouer, vnto the Ilands, and how the Spaniards dealt with him: that although hee had béene informed pa••ti∣cularly in all thinges, by the Captaine Omoncon and Sin∣say, yet he was in a ielousie that they tolde him not the tr••eth. Hée was nothing deceiued in that hee suspected,) for after that our souldiers had made a true relation of the comming of the rouer vnto Manilla, and of all the rest as you haue heard in the discourse thereof in this booke, he found that they differed very much, the one from the other, for that they did attribute it wholly vnto themselues to get honour and benefite: but the Insuanto like a wise man straightwayes vnderstood their pre∣tence. But when that he perceiued that Limahon was nei∣ther dead nor prisoner, but onely besieged, he offered vnto them that if they would returne againe vnto Pagansinan vpon him whereas he was, hée would giue vnto them fiue hundred ships of warre, with people suf••••cient to serue both by sea and lande,* 1.28 and more if they would request. They answered him, that all such cost and labour were but in vaine, for that the generall of the fielde who hath him in siege, with the people and ships that he hath, are sufficient to ende that enterprise, and to

send him hither aliue or deade, and that long before that their fleete should come thither. And besides this, their Ilands were poore of victuals, and could not sustaine so great an armie ma∣ny dayes. Being satisfied with these reasons, hee gaue place that the interpreter which they brought should come in where as they were, for hee remained at the doore without, for that he would be fully certified to auoid the suspitious doubt he had before he come in presence, yet he did help them very much. So when their interpreter was come in, the Spaniards séeing good occasion and oportunitie for to declare that which passed the day before, betwixt them and the fathers, touching the spea∣king vnto him on their knées: and séeing as it seemed vnto thē that he was at that time in a good mind for to heare them,* 1.29 they did vtter vnto him all the whole contention (after that they had declared many reasons of great consideration, to giue them to vnderstand that it was not conuenient to do it, but especially to religious men, who were there as principals ouer the rest, vn∣to whom the king of Spaine (their lord) himselfe doth stand on foote, when as they do intreat of any matter, although it be but of small importance: for that they are priests and ministers of God, whom he doth worship and reuerence.

The Insuanto with a merry countenance did answere them, that vnto that time he vnderstood no more of them, then in that he was informed by the captaine Omoncon, and did not ac∣knowledge them to be any other but Castillas: without know∣in•• wherefore they came, nor from whom, for lacke of the let∣t•••••• sent from their gouernor, and generall of the fielde the first time that he spake with them: neither had he any knowledge of the custome of their countrie: yet notwithstanding, that which hath passed heere, without any exception of person, if they would take it in good part, in that which is to come shall be amended: and from that day forwards, at al times whenso∣euer it were their pleasure to come of themselues, or at such time as they were sent for, for to talke with him as they doo vse in Castilla or Spaine, vnto such of their dignitie and vocation, the which he granted with a very good will: a••though hee not grant vnto any that preheminence, no not vnto a vizroy, ex∣cept he were an ambassador sent from some king. With this resolution, and with many other good wordes they tooke their

leaue of him, and went ioyfull and content vnto their lodgings, wheras they sound the friers wearie with entertaining of such as did visite them, and with great desire to sée them, to knowe wherefore the Insuanto did send for them, with whome they had béene so long time. But after that that they vnderstoode the effect of the whole, and how that the gouernor did permit that they should talke with him after their owne fashion, they were maruellously glad thereof, and had a very good hope to conclude their pretence, wherefore they went, and praised God for the good successe of that which they pretended.

CHAP. XX. The gouernor doth banquet the Spaniards, and afterwards make all thinges in a redinesse for to go vnto Aucheo▪ whereas the vizroy tarieth their comming.

THe next day following, the gouernor called a Gentleman of his house vnto him, and commanded him to go and vi∣site the Spaniards, and to informe himselfe of them if that that they lacked any thing, as well in their victuals as in their lodgings, and to know if they did require any thing particular to themselues to aduise him therof, and he would furnish them forthwith for the loue that hee bare vnto them, for their good contractation, and for the great seruice that they had done vnto the king, in the businesse of Limahon. And also that he should in his name inuite them for the next day folowing to dine with him in his house. This Gentleman went vnto them and ac∣complished his message: and the Spaniards answered, kissing his hande for the great care hée had of them: saying that they were furnished in all thinges aboundantly (as in trueth they were) and how they were maruellously well lodged, chéered, and lacked nothing: and that the great care hee had of them was agréeable vnto the hope they had of his good presence and gentlenesse: accepting the inuiting for the next day, the which was giuen them, and accomplished in this forme fol∣lowing.

The next day when they went vnto the pallace which was at dinner time, they were caried into a hall that was below in the second court, whereas were many chaires of veluet & tables

that were painted with their frontals before: they had no ta∣ble clothes on them, for that they doo not vse any in that coun∣trie, as hath beene told you in the first part of this historie, nei∣ther is it néedfull for their maner of feeding. In the first chaires they caused the Friers to sit downe, euery one at a table by himselfe, and each of them other sixe tables, placed in or∣der, compassing ••ounde like a circle: then were the Spanish souldiers set in the same manner, and each of them had fiue ta∣bles, and next vnto them the captaine of the guard b••longing vnto the gouernor, and two other Captaines: and euerie one of them had three tables. For that it is the custome of that coun∣trie to make a difference in the qualitie of the guestes, by the n••mber of the tables. All these were placed in circle or com∣passe (as aforesaide) that they might see one another. In the midest betwixt them there was a round compasse, wheras was represented a comedie with much pastime, and indured all the dinnner time, and a good while after. There was also great store of verie good and excellent musicke, accompanied with gallant voyces, also iesters, with puppets and other thinges of great pastime, to driue the time away.

On the first table was set to euery one of the guestes, lit∣tle baskets wrought with golde and siluer wyre, full of swéete meates made of sugar, as Marchpanes, Castels, Pitchers, Pots, Dishes, Dogges, Bulles, Elephants, and other things verie curious, and all guilt: besides this there were many di∣shes full of flesh, as Capons, Hennes, Géese, Teales, ga∣mons of Bacon, peeces of Béefe, and other sortes of flesh wherewith all the tables were replenished, sauing that where∣at they did sit to dine, which was replenished with victuals that was dressed (for all the other was rawe) and was of so great aboundance, that there was at times more then fiftie di∣shes, and they were serued with great curiositie. They had wine of diuers sortes, and of that which they doo make in that countrie of the Palme trée, but of so great excellencie, that they founde no lacke of that which was made of Grapes. The din∣ner endured foure houres, and according vnto the aboundance and diuersitie they had in victuals, it might haue indured eight houres, for it was in so good order that it might haue béene gi∣uen vnto any prince in the world.

Their seruants and slaues that they brought with them at the same time, did dine in another hal nigh vnto the same, with so great abundance as their masters. When dinner was done, the gouernor commanded the people to come vnto him, with whom he did talke and comon with great friendship, and good conuersation, and would not consent that they shoulde kneele downe, neither to bee bare headed. So after that hee had made vnto them tokens of friendshippe, and deteined them a while, in demaunding of many thinges, lastly he told them that there was an order come from the vizroy of Aucheo, that they shuld go thither with great spéede, so that it did require that they shoulde depart the next day following, for the which they were verie glad and ioyfull, for that they had great desire the one to sée the other: and againe with him they might treate and co∣mon tguching their comming into that countrie, and for what intent: and for all other things néedfull, for that he was a man fit for their purpose, and one welbeloued of the king. So hee tooke his leaue of vs with great friendship and curtesie: who did surrender the same after our custome, putting of our cappes, and making reuerence, for the which hee made shewe that it greatly contented him.

At their going foorth out of the hall, they found the captaine that did dine with them, and with him many other Gentlemen that tarried their comming for to beare them company vnto their lodging: going before them many seruants, that did carie the raw meate, that was vpon the other tables ouer and aboue that which they did eate on, the which was done for great ma∣ie••tie, and a ceremony verie much vsed in that kingdom, so ma∣ny times as they do make any banquet.

So when they came vnto their lodging they founde that the Insuanto had sent them a very good present, in the which was for euery one of them foure péeces of silke, and counting chestes with other thinges, and certaine painted mantels for the ser∣uants and slaues. So after they had taken their leaue of the captaines and Gentlemen that did beare them companie home, they beganne with great ioy to put all thinges in order for their iourney the next day following.

CHAP. XXI. The Spaniards departe from the Cittie of Chincheo, and commeth to that of Aucheo, whereas the vizroy did tar∣rie their comming.

THe next day in the morning before that the Spaniards were stirring, there was within the house all thinges ne∣cessary for their iourney, as well of litter chaires, as of horses and men for to carrie them, and their stuffe, the which they did with so good a will (as aforesaid) that they did fall out and striue amongst themselues, who should be the first that should receiue their burthen. So all things being in good order, they departed, hauing in their companie the same captaine and souldiers, that vnto that time had béene their guard, vntil they came vnto the cittie of Aucheo, whereas the vizroy was. This iourney was vnto them ioyfull, as well for to entreate of matters touching their comming, and to be resolued what they shuld do, as also to depart out of Chincheo, whereas they passed much trouble, by reason of the great number of people that came for to sée them, who neuer would be satisfied: and y^t was in such extremity, that some dayes at tenne of the clocke in the night, the stréete round about their lodging were full of people, and onely to sée them, which caused great trouble and heate with their rumor & presse amongst them. This day by reason they vnderstood that they should depart, the prease and multitude of the people was so great, that although they had tip staues before them, to beate the people away and to make roome, yet was it almost night before they could get out of the citie: so that they were constrained to remaine in a towne there hard by all that night, where as by the commandement of the gouernour they were verie well lodged, and their supper made readie in verie good order, as it was in seauen dayes together, till such time as they came vnto Aucheo without taking for the same or for anie o∣ther thing necessarie for their sustentation, anie price or value. There went continuallie before them a Post with a prouision from the gouernour, written in a great borde wherein was declared who they were, and from whence they came, and commanding that there should bee prouided for

them all things necessarie in abundance, vppon the kings cost, which was the occasion that so much people came for to sée them, that in the high waies they were many times disturbed: so with great trouble, the thirde day they came vnto a citie which was called Megoa, which was sometimes the head go∣uernement, the which was offortie thousand housholds, but a great part thereof was dispeopled: the occasion thereof they tolde vs, (and was) that about thirtie yeares past, the Ia∣pones, who brought for their guides thrée Chinos, who doo nowe dwell in Manilla, and are become Christians, and came vpon that cittie, (to reuenge themselues of an iniurie that was done vnto them) the which they put in execution with so great secrecie and policie, that they made themselues lords of the ci∣tie without any daunger or hurt vnto themselues: for that fif∣tie Iapones, men fit for that purpose, did apparell themselues in Chinos apparell without being knowne, and came vnto a gate of the Cittie, whereas the souldiers that had the charge thereof were voide of all suspition of any enimies that woulde come, which was the occasion that their armor and weapon was not all in a redinesse. And within a little while after that, followed two thousand that did disembarke themselues in a se∣creat and vnknowne place, and came in verie secret order, be∣cause they would not be discouered, and did beset that gate of the cittie, whereas their companions were, which they sent be∣fore: who so soone as they saw them nigh at hande, drewe out their weapons the which they caried hid vnder their apparell, and set vpon the souldiers (that were voide of feare and vnar∣med) with so great furie and force, that they being amased were easilie slaine, so that they were lordes of the gate, where∣as they left verie good guard, and followed their victorie, and made themselues lordes of the Cittie, without any daunger vnto their persons, and did possesse the same certaine dayes, and did sacke the same in spite of them all, with great harme and losse vnto the inhabitants thereof, vntill such time as the vizroy of Aucheo did l••uie an armie togither of thrée score and tenne thousande men, and went vpon them with courage for to bée reuenged on the iniurie receiued, with the death of all the Iapones: but they séeing that they coulde not defend them∣selues against so manie, in one night they left the Cittie and

went vnto their shippes, whereas they had left them in verie good order, and carried with them the spoile of the Cittie, lea∣uing it beaten downe and dispopulared the greater part there∣of: in which sort the Spaniards founde it, and the iniurie re∣ceiued so fresh in their minds as though it had béene doone the day before.

In this Citie they were lodged in the kings house, the which was of verie great & faire buildings: there was giuen them to dine and suppe in very good order, and with aboundance. So soone as they came thither, the Friers remained in their lodg∣ings, but Pedro Sarmiento and Miguel de Loarcha went to visite the gouernor, vsing the spanish curtesie with him: and he receiued them with great ioy and curtesie. After they had taken their leaue and returned vnto their lodgings, the gouernor sent to visite them El Tyu, who is the auncientest of his counsaile, who was with them a good while verie friendly, and offered his seruice in all thinges that were néedfull, and so departed to his house maruellously well accompanied.

The gouernor sent vnto the two souldiers that went to visite him, e••h of them two péeces of silke.

At their departure from this Cittie, trauelling towards Au∣cheo, they passed ouer a mightie great ryuer, by a bridge all made of stone: the goodliest and greatest that euer they had séene, whose greatnesse did cause wonderful admiration, so that they stayed and did measure it from one end to another, that it might be put amongst the wonders of that country, which they tooke a note of. They found that it was one thousand and thrée hundred foote long, and that the least stone wherewith it was built, was ofseuentéene foote, and many of two and twentie foote long, and eight foote broad, and séemed vnto them a thing impossible to be brought thither by mans art, for that all round about so farre as they could sée, was plaine ground without a∣ny mountaines: by which they iudged them to be brought from farre. When they were passed that bridge, they trauelled al the rest of the day till night vpon a causie that was very broad and plaine, and on both sides many victualling houses, and the fieldes sowed with Rice, wheate, and other séeds: and so full of people as in the stréetes of a good towne or cittie.

So when they came into the suburbes of the citie of Aucheo,

they founde order and commandement from the vizroy, what should be done, as more at large shalbe declared vnto you in the chapter following.

CHAP. XXII. The entrie of the Spaniards into the Cittie of Aucheo, and how the vizroy did entertaine and receiue them.

AFter they had trauelled more then halfe a league in the suburbs of the cittie of Aucheo, they met with a post that came from the vizroy: who brought order that they should re∣remaine in a house that was appointed for them in the said su∣burbs, and there to be lodged for that night, for that it was late, & they could not come vnto the house appointed in the cittie for them, or else peraduenture to giue content vnto many that had great desire to sée those strangers, for that they must passe tho∣rough the Cittie, and better to bee séene in the day then in the night. So soone as they were alighted, there came a gentleman to visite them, sent from the vizroy to bidde them welcome, and to know howe they did with their iourney, and also to sée that they were well prouided for that night of all things necessarie, and that in aboundance. After all the which being done, he told them that the viceroy did verie much reioyce of their comming, and for that it was late, and the Citie farre off, it was his plea∣sure that they shoulde bee lodged that night in the suburbes vn∣till the next day, then will he giue order, that they may enter into the Cittie with the authoritie conuenient vnto their per∣sons. After this Gentleman came other Captaines to visite them, and brought with them great store of conserues, wine, and fruit: which is a common custome amongst them, when that they go in the like visitation, and it is carried by their seruants in little baskets very curiously wrought, or else in barrels made of earth all guilt. Within two houres after their comming thither, there came another messenger from the viz∣roy with many men laden with Capons, Hens, Géese, Teales, gamons of Bacon and conserues of diuers sorts, and of great a∣bundance, sufficient for one hundreth men to sup that night, and for their dinner the next day.

The next day in the morning very early, there came much

people vnto their lodging, sent by the vizroy, and brought with them two rich Chaires for to carrie the fathers in, and the cur∣tines tied vp, that they might the better be seene, and for their companions verie good horses, sadled after the fashion which they doo vse. They forthwith made haste for to depart, and al∣though they made great spéed, yet were they a good houre and a halfe before they coulde come vnto the gates of the Cittie, and séemed vnto them that they had trauelled two leagues in the suburbes: the which was so well peopled, so faire houses, and many shoppes full of merchandise, that if it had not beene told them, they would not haue beléeued it to be the suburbes, but the cittie it selfe.

Before they came vnto the gates, they passed a mightie ri∣uer thrée times ouer bridges that were great and verie faire, and the riuer so déepe, that great shippes came vp the same, but their mastes stooping downe, to passe vnder the bridges. This Cittie is the richest and the best prouided that is in all the king∣dome: it is the heade Cittie of all the Prouince, verie rich and fertill, and manie townes belonging vnto it, and but eight leagues from the sea, and hath mightie riuers, wherein great shippes come vp to it as aforesaide. At the enterie of the Citie, they founde many Gentlemen that were there at the gate tarrying their comming: who after they had saluted the one the other after their fashions, without anie staying they trauelled forwardes on, thorough a great and broad stréet that went directlie vnto the vizroy his pallace: vpon both sides of the stréete, from the gate forwards was placed one by ano∣ther full of souldiers with their officers and ancient, euerie one with his weapon in his hands, as pickes, hargabuses, swords and target, all apparelled in one liuerie of silke, and a bunch of fethers vppon their crestes. They all stoode still and kept their places, and would not consent that any should crosse the way in the streete, whereas they went accompanied with the Gentlemen.

They had no leasure to tell the souldiers, but they sawe that from the gate vntil they came vnto the vizroyes pallace on both sides, which was a good way to beefull of them, and all richly apparelled and of one colour. The people that were at the windowes & in the stréete, betwixt the houses & the soldiers

were so great a number that it séemed to bee doomes day, and that all the people in the worlde were there ioyned together in that streete.

So when they came vnto the pallace which was two houres after day, the Gentlemen that were their guides did cause the Spaniardes to enter into a roome which was hard by, till such time as the gate was open, for that it is open but once a day, & so continue no longer time then the audience endureth, which is done by the Uiceroy once euerie day, and that is but a small time. But first before he doth enter into audience, there is shot off foure péeces of artilerie, with a great noyse of trompettes drommes and waites. And there is no day that passeth without audience, as our people did sée by experience so long as they were there, and were likewise informed of others. The houre being come, and the ceremony doone as aforesaide, the gates were opened, and there was in the court many souldiers, ap∣parelled in the same liuerie that those were of in the stréete. From the middest amongst them came forth a gentleman who was as it was told them, the Captaine of the garde of the vice∣roy, who came with great grauitie and authoritie towards the place whereas our people were, and after they had saluted the one the other, he made signes vnto them that they should go to∣wardes the gates of the pallace. When they were within the first court, the which was great and wrought with mightie pil∣lers, there was a great number of souldiers, & many sergeants that entred into an other great court, and mounted vp a paire of stayres that was on the one side, whereas all the people were with great silence, sauing the captaine of the garde, who went with our people till they came to the gates of the hall, whereas was the viceroy, at which gate he staied with his head discoue∣red, and made signes vnto ours that they should doo the like, and to tarrie there till such time as hee had aduised the viceroy of their comming, and he to command them to enter.

CHAP. XXIII. The Spaniardes haue audience of the Viceroy of Aucheo, and are visited of some of the principall officers, who de∣clare vnto them certaine thinges of that citie.

THen straightwayes came foorth of the hall a man appa∣relled in a long robe, of good personage, and asked of the Spaniards if they would speake with the viceroy, & they answered, yea: then asked he again from whō they came & by whom they were sent, they answered, y^t they were sent by the gouernor of Philippinas, who was seruant vnto the migh∣tiest king in all Christendome. When he had this answere he returned againe into the hall, and within a little while after he came forth, & bad thē come in, but gaue them to vnderstand, that in entring into the hall wheras the viceroy was, y^t they should kneele downe, & talke with him in that order till he comman∣ded to the contrarie, if they would vse this ceremony, that then they should come in, if not that they shold returne back againe. They who were certified thereof by the gouernor of Chincheo did not stand therein, but saide y^t they would obserue ••he order giuen vnto them. Therewith he went in, who séemed to be the master of ceremonies, making a signe that they should follow after him, and doo that which he willed them to do.

At the entring in at the doore they stayed a little, and then knéeled downe right oueragainst there whereas the Uiceroye sate in a chaire verie high like vnto a throne, with a table be∣fore him, and was in so darke a place that almost they coulde not see his face verie well. On the one side of him there were some like vnto Heraldes of armes, with sc••pters in their handes, and on the other side two men of a gallant comlinesse armed with Corselets made of skales of golde downe to the cafe of their legges, with bowes in their handes of golde, and quiuers at their backes of the same. Both the one and the o∣ther were vpon their knées. There was vpon the table before him, paper and all thinges necessarie to write: which is an or∣dinarie vse amongest them at all times, when there is anye publike audience, and on the one side of the borde a Lion made of blacke woode, which was (as after they vnderstoode) the armes of that prouince. So straightwayes hee made signes vnto them to drawe neare, which they did, and knéeled downe a little from the table which was whereas the master of ce∣remonies did will them. In this sort they beganne to talke with him by their interpreter, and tolde them the occasion of their comming into that Citie and kingdome, and from whom

and vnto whome they were sent. But hee made signes vnto them that they should arise, the which they did with a verye good will▪ and did perseuer in their intent. But the Uiceroye did cut them off before they coulde make an ende, and asked if they had brought any letter from their king, vnto the king his Lorde, whome they would goe to sée and talke with: but when they answered no, hee straightwayes tooke his leaue of them, saying that th••y were welcome, and that they should de∣part vnto their lodginges and to take their ease, for that after∣wardes they should haue occasion to declare their mindes vn∣to him, and hee would giue them their answere, for that the king was farre of, and it requireth a long time to come where∣as he is, but he would write vnto him, and according vnto his commandement he would make them answere. And therwith he tooke the letter, and the memoriall of the present, and com∣manded in his presence, to put about the neckes of the Friers in manner of a scarfe to eyther of them sixe péeces of silke, and vnto the souldiers their companions, and vnto Omoncon and Sinsay each of them foure péeces, and to euerye one of their seruantes two a péece, and to giue vnto the two Fryers and the souldiers, Omoncon and Sinsay, euerie one of them two branches of siluer, which is a thing vsed in that countrie, vnto them that haue doone some woorthie déede, as hath béene tolde you before.

So with the silke about their neckes and with the branches in their hands, they returned out of the hall & downe the staires the way they came, and so through the court into the stréetes▪ from whence they sawe them shut the court gate with so great a noyse as when they did open it. From thence at the request of Omoncon & Sinsay they went vnto the house of Totoc who is the Captaine generall of all the men of warre & vnto the house of Cagnito•• who is y^e chiefe standerd bearer: their houses were nigh the one the other, very faire & great. They found thē with as great maiestie as the viceroy, and in the same order, with a table before them, & had on ech side of thē armed souldiers, knée∣ling on their knées. Yet did they not vse our men with the cur∣tesie that the viceroy vsed, to cause them to stand vp, which was the occasion, that straightwayes they made a showe that they would depart and be gone, complayning of Omoncon & Sinsay

for that they did carrie them thether, and tolde them with an∣ger that the gouernour of Manilla did intreate them in a diffe∣rent sort, who was there resident for the mightiest prince in all the worlde, and they but easie marchants, neither was their going thether to be equalled, vnto the benefite that they cam•• thether for. This discontent the which they receiued was the occasion that they would n••t go to make any more visitations, although the sayde Omoncon and Sinsay for their owne in∣terest, would haue carried them to the houses of other officers and gentlemen of the court. But they made signes vnto those that were their guides, to direct their way vnto their lodgings for that they would goe to eate somewhat, and to take their ease, the which was ordayned in a great house of the kinges, there whereas ordinarily the Iudges doo sit to heare matters of Iustice.

So at their comming thether they founde all their stuffe in good order, and their dinner marueilous well prouided, and the whole house hanged and trimmed as though it had béene for the kings owne person, with many wayting men and soul∣diers those which did gard them both day and night, and hang∣ing at the doore two tables or bordes (commanded by the vice∣roy) wheron was written who they were, that were there lod∣ged, and from whence they came, and wherefore, and that none whosoeuer, should be so hardie as to offer them any wrong or disturbance, vpon paine to be for the same offence seuerely pu∣nished. In this house they were more in quiet, than in anie other place whereas they had béen,* 1.30 neyther did the people giue them so much trouble, by reason of the great care which the Iudges had in putting order for the same, by the commandemēt of the viceroy, yet was it the greatest towne and most populed of all that prouince (although in other prouinces there be that be much bigger) and is affirmed that the Citie of Taybin or Suntiem (there whereas the king and his court is resident) hath thrée hundreth thousande housholds,* 1.31 and yet there is a bigger Citie in the kingdome called, Lanchin, which requireth thrée dayes to go from one gate to an other, and is in compasse more then seuentie leagues, the which is not far distant from Canton, that which the Portingalles hath great notice of. But of certaine there is very much spoken of the mightinesse of this

Citie, and I my selfe haue heard reported and affirmed to bee of a trueth, by men of authoritie that haue béene in the Citie of Canton, religious Fryers of the order of Iesus or Iesuites to whom ought to be giuen credite.

This Citie of Aucheo hath a verie faire and strong wall made of stone which is fiue fadam high, and foure fadam brode,* 1.32 the which was measured many times by our people, for that they had a gate out of their lodging that did open to the same. This wall is all couered ouer with tiles to defende the rayne water for hurting of it, which could not to the contrarie but re∣ceiue damage, for that there is no lyme vsed in the whole wall. They haue not one castle in all this Citie, neyther is there any vsed in all that kingdome, for all their force and strength is in their gates the which be made very strong, with a double wall within verie broade, betwixt the which are continually many souldiers such as do keepe watch and ward both day and night.

Upon these gates they haue much ordinance, but verie ill wrought (I meane such as were séene by our men) yet they do say that in other places they haue excellent good and verie cu∣riously wrought. The whole wall is full of bartilmentes, and theron written the names of such souldiers as are bound to re∣payre thether in the time of necessitie. At euerie hundreth pa∣ces they haue lodginges the which are very huge and great: there whereas in the time of necessitie doo remaine and dwell their Captaynes, so long as their troubles doo indure, all the wall is fortified with two great mots or ditches the one with∣in and the other without,* 1.33 the which they doo fill at all times when they please, by sluces which they haue from the riuer for the same purpose, and doo serue of water almost all the hou∣ses in the Citie, whereas they haue their stanges for the most part full of fish This mightie Citie is situated in a great plaine and compassed round about with mightie rockes and moun∣taines, which is the occasion that it is not so healthfull, and the inhabitants saye, that it is by reason of the mountaines, and many times it is ouerflowen in the winter by spring tides frō the riuer. And in that yeare that this doth happen it doth de∣stroy and ruinate a great part of the city, as it was at that time when our people did sée it, for y^t in the winter before they were troubled with these great tides, which did them much harme.

Now to returne to our purpose, you shall vnderstand that in the kinges house aforesaide, our people remained all the time that they were in this Citie, wheras they were made much of, and visited by the principall of the same, but in especiall of the viceroy, who the verie same day di•• send to inuite them for the next day following, who made vnto them a famous banket, as you shall vnderstand in this chapter following.

CHAP. XXIIII. The viceroy doth banket our people in his owne house two daies one after the other.

THe next day after that our people came into the Citie, the Uiceroy did sende to inuite them to dinner to his owne house, whereas he made them a great banket in the forme following. At their comming vnto the pallace there came foorth a great number of Gentlemen, seruantes vnto the viceroy, to bid them welcome, with great store of musicke and tokens of mirth. Being entred into the first court, they brought them in∣to a mightie hall that was marueilously well trimmed, where∣in was a great number of tables set in such order as they were in the banket that was made them by the gouernour of Chin∣cheo, (as hath beene tolde you) although in the number and furniture did far excell the other. But before they did sit down, there came vnto them two captaines principall men, vnto whō the viceroy had committed the charge of the banket, to doo all things in his name, for that it is a custome in that kingdome, that noble mē must not be present in their bankets they make. So the charge was giuen vnto them, to make thē be mery, and to bid his guests welcome. When they came vnto them they v∣sed great curtesie, and passed away the time in gall••nt discour∣ses, till it was time to go to dinner, & that they began to bring in their victuals.* 1.34 Then before they did sit downe, the captaines did take ech of them a cup in his hande, in maner of a Sorlue as they do vse, and being full of wine, they went together where∣as they might discouer the heauē and offered it vnto the sunne, and vnto the saints of heauen, adding thereunto many words of prayers: but principally they did request that the comming of their newe guestes might be profitable vnto them all, and

that the friendship which they did pretende to establish, might be for good both vnto the one and to the other. This their ora∣tion and prayer being done they did spill out the wine making a great courtesie, then were they straightwayes filled againe, and making reuerence vnto their guestes euerie one by him∣selfe, they set the cuppes downe vpon the tables whereas the fathers should dine whereas they were set euerie one by him∣selfe. This being doone, the first seruice was set vppon the bordes, and the Captaines were set at other tables, which were not so many in number, nor so well furnished nor dressed as the other: the dinner was famous and of manie diuersities of meates, excéeding verie much that which was made them by the Gouernor of Aucheo.

The time which the banket indured (which was verie late) there was great store of musicke of diuers instrumentes, as of vials, gitterns, and rebuckes, and with them many iesters did make them mer••y at their dinner. The which being done, the saide Captaines did beare their guests companie out of the pal∣lace, whereas they did anew inuite them to dinner for the next day in the same h••ll: they obeying their request did come, wher∣as was made vnto them a banket more famous than the first.

This day at the banket was present the Totoc, hee whome they visited the first day, came in his owne house, and founde with so great maiestie. Likewise there dyned with them the Captaynes that were at the first banket.* 1.35 In this seconde banket they had as the day before, verie much musicke, and a Comedie that indured long, with manie pretie and merrie iestes: there was also a tombler,* 1.36 who did his feates verie ar∣tificially, as well in vauting in the ayre, as vppon a staffe that two men did hold on their shoulders. Before the comedie did beginne, was tolde them by their interpreter the signific••∣tion thereof, that the better they might content themselues in the conceiuing, whose argument was, that in times past,* 1.37 there was in that countrie manie mightie and valiant men. But amongest them all, there was in particular thrée brethren that did excéede all the rest that euer were in mightinesse and vali∣antnesse. The one of them was a white man, the other was ruddish or hie coloured and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 third blacke. The ruddish be∣ing more ingenious, and of better industrie, did procure

••o make his white brother king, the which iudgement was a∣gréeable vnto the rest. Then they altogether did take away the kingdome from him that did at that time raigne, who was cal∣led Laupicono, an effeminate man and verie vicious. This they did represent verie gallantly with garmentes verie méete for those personages.

The banket and play beeing finished, according as they did the day before, the Captaynes did beare them companie till they were out of the pallace, and from thence they went vnto their lodgings, with their ordinarie companie appointed by the viceroy, which was that Captaine that we haue spoken of, with his souldiers, who neither night nor day dooth not depart from their garde.

CHAP. XXV. The Spaniards do carie their present vnto the viceroy, who hauing receiued it by the hands of Omoncon doth seale it and sende it vnto the king: our men bee forbidden to goe foorth of their houses to see any thing in the Citie: and it doth intreat of other particular things.

THe same night our men did common amongst themselues, to sée if it were good presently to giue order to put in vre the thing they came for: séeing that they might treat ther∣of with the Uiceroy, he being a man that shewed vnto them so much fauour and good will. So in conclusion they were all resolued that straightwayes the next daye in the morning, shoulde goe vnto him Michaell de Loarcha, and Peter Sar∣miento, and carrie vnto him the present which they brought, and to haue with them to beare them company Omoncon and Sinsay, and being presented, to request that hee would appoint a day when they might goe and talke with him about princi∣pall matters.

This accorde they put in execution according vnto their de∣termination, and the two souldiers went and carried the pre∣sent as it was agreed. So they came vnto the pallace, and ha∣uing tarried till such time as they opened the gates of the audi∣ence, (which was with the ceremony spoken of in the 22. chap∣ter) it was tolde vnto the viceroy that the Castillos were there

and had brought a present, who incontinent saide that as then he ••ould not talke with them: but that the captaine Omoncon & Sinsay should enter in with the present, and that they should returne vnto their lodginges, for that he had a care to call them when that oportunitie did serue to intreat of all things to their pleasure. They did as they were ••ommaunded, and those who carried the present in, did afterwarde giue our people to vnder∣stand all that had passed with them, saying that in opening the present, there was a note thereof taken before a notarie, and straightwayes commanded to bee put in againe where it was taken out before the sayde notarie & other witnesses, the which being done he sealed it vp, and sent it vnto the Citie of Taybin vnto the king and his counsell, and therewith that which the Gouernour of Chincheo did sende him, as shall be tolde you: for that they haue a rigorous lawe in that kingdome, that dooth prohibite all such as haue any office of gouernement, to receiue any present of what qualitie so euer it be, without ly∣cence of the king or of his counsell, vpon paine to be depriued of bearing anie office all the dayes of their liues, and to bee ba∣nished and condemned to weare red bonnets (as wee haue de∣clared the effect thereof.)

This is conformable vnto that which the gouernor of Chin∣cheo did, in the presence of our people, at such time as they went to take their leaue of him, for to goe vnto Aucheo, which was, that in their presence they commanded to take foorth all that they brought him in present, and shewing it vnto them péece by peece. He asked if it were that which they had brought, and they aunswered that it was the same (although it was with troubled mindes) beléeuing that it was to checke them because it was so small in respect of their mightinesse: he asked them if there lacked any thing, they answered no, then straight∣wayes he commanded to put it againe whereas it was taken out in their presence, and before a notarie and witnesses: the which being doone, was mailed and sealed and so sent vnto the viceroy of Aucheo in their companie, and saide that hee could not receiue it without the licence aforesaid.

So our souldiers séeing that they could not be suffered to en∣ter in with the present, they tooke it for a great discourtesie and disfauour, and therewith departed vnto their lodging, to

giue the fathers to vnderstande thereof, who liked not well thereof, but yet they concluded amongest themselues to suffer for a while, and to commit vnto God the direction thereof, as it best may be for his holy seruice.

The next day following, the viceroy did send to visite them, and to aske of them a sword, a hargubush and a ••laske: for that he would cause others to be made by them, the which they did send, and afterwardes vnderstood, that they had counterfeited the same although not in so perfect manner.

Then after a time our people seeing, that their beeing in that citie séemed to be long and like to be longer, they did pro∣cure to driue away the time in the best manner they could, and went abroad into the citie and did by eyther of them that which they thought best.* 1.38 Whereof they found great abundance, and of so small price, that they bought it almost for nothing.

They bought many bookes that did intreat of diuerse mat∣ters, which they brought with them to the Ilands (as appeareth more at large in the chapter for the same.)

The next day they went to sée the gates of the Citie, and all such curious thinges as were to be séene so farre as they could learne or vnderstande, which were many. But amongst them all they sawe a sumptuous temple of their Idolles,* 1.39 in whose chiefe chappell they counted one hundred and eleuen Idols, be∣sides a great number more that were in other particular chap∣pels, all were of carued worke, verie well proportioned and gilted: but in especiall thrée of them that were placed in the middest of all the rest, the one had thrée heads procéeding out of one bodie, the one looking on the other in full face. The se∣cond was the forme of a woman with a childe in her armes, the third of a man apparelled after the forme and fashion that the Christians doo paint the Apostles. Of all the rest some had foure armes, and some had sixe, and other eight, and other some marueilous deformed monsters. Before them they had bur∣ning lamps, and many swéete parfumes and smelles, but in especiall before the thrée aboue specified.

But when that the viceroy did vnderstande that our peo∣ple did go viewing the Citie gates and temples (and percei∣ueth that they that gaue him the notice did suspect it that it was to some ill intent) therewith he straightwayes comman∣ded

that they should not goe ••oorth out of their lodging without ••is licence: and likewise commanded the Captaine that was their garde not to consent thereunto as he had done, and like∣wise that none should carrie them any thing for to sell, for he that did it should be punished with whipping. Yet notwith∣standing, they had euerie day verie sufficient necessaries for their personages in such ample wise, that there did alwayes remaine, and not lacke.

In this closenesse and kéeping in, they suffered many dayes with much sadnesse, and oppressed with melancholick humors, to sée that their purpose wherefore they went thether séemed to be long, and euerie day was worse & worse. Yet no••withstan∣ding they did passe it ouer in the best wise they could, in cōmit∣ting it with heartie zeale vnto God, for whose honor and glorie they did attempt that voyage, & prayed vnto him for to mooue their hearts to consent that the religious fathers might remaine in that countrie, for to learne the language (as they had begun many daies before) by which meanes their soules might be sa∣ued, and clearely deliuered from the tyrannie of the diuell, who of truth had them in possession. So after many dayes that they had remained in that close estate as aforesaide, they determi∣ned for to goe and talke with the viceroy, and to bee fully re∣solued either to tarry or returne from whence they came. They straightwayes did put it in vre, and what ensued thereof you shall vnderstande in the chapter following.

CHAP. XXVI. The Spaniardes talke with the Viceroy, and not being suf∣fered, they do write to him a letter, and he doth answere it by word of mouth, with other particular matters.

IT hath béen declared vnto you, that the same day y^t the Spa∣niardes did talke with the viceroy, he asked them if they had brought any letter for their king, they answered no: he tolde them that he would write vnto the court, and hauing answere, they should be fully satisfied of their pretence and demaund.

But they séeing that his aunswere was long a comming and great delaye made therein, and that they had them as halfe prisoners, they determined to go and speake with the

viceroy, to be fully satisfied of his determinate will & pretence, and to haue some order eyther to goe vnto the court, or to re∣maine in that citie, or else to returne vnto the Ilands, and there to tarrie the time till it pleased God to open a gate in that king∣dome, wherein might enter his holy gospell.

With this their pretended purpose, they did perswade with their captaine to permit them so much libertie as for to go and speake with the viceroy, who for that hee bare them loue and good will did consent therevnto. So they went, but when they came thether they that kept the gates would not consent y^t they should enter, which was the occasion that they returned vnto their lodgings verie sad and sorrowfull, and almost without a∣ny hope to bring their matter to passe, for the which they went thether, for that it séemed vnto them although they did plainely declare vnto them their pretence, yet did they worke in such or∣der for to cause them to depart. In this order they remained in the citie certaine daies, and for to conclude either to stay there or depart the kingdome, they were resolute, and determined to write a letter vnto the viceroy, and therein to giue him to vn∣derstand particularly, that their comming thether into y^e coun∣trie was to intreat that betwixt thē & the Castillos there should be peace & friendship, and being concluded that their souldiers should with that newes, depart vnto the Ilandes from whence they came, to giue the gouernor to vnderstand therof, & they to remaine in that countrie preaching y^e holy gospell. They could finde none that would write this letter for them, although they would haue payed them very well for their paines. Till in the end, by great request and prayings the captaine Omoncon did write it for them▪ and straightwaies departed vnto the citie of Ampin that was not farre off, making an excuse for to go & sée the visitor of the prouince whom they doo call Sadin: he would very faine haue carried with him two of our people, y^t he might haue séene them, but none would go with him. This iourney which Omoncon made, hee did it to put away the suspition they might conceiue, that he did write the letter, if that perad∣uenture the viceroy would take it in ill part.

* 1.40Their letter being written, they found great difficulty in the sending the same, for that there was n••ne that would carie it, neyther would they consent that our men should enter into the

pallace to deliuer it. But in conclusion, what with requestes and giftes they perswaded their Captayne of their gard to car∣rie it, who did deliuer the same vnto the viceroye, in name of the Castillos, saying that hee tooke it of them to bring it vnto him, for that they did certifie him, that it was a thing that did import verie much. Hauing read the letter, hee answered that he would giue the king to vnderstande thereof, as he saide at the first time. And in that touching the Fryers remay∣ning in that countrie to preach, at that time hee could make them no answere, for that in such matters it was first requisite to haue the good will of the Royall Counsell▪ Yet would hee make answere vnto the letter they brought from the Gouer∣nour of Manilla, and that they might depart, and returne a∣gaine at such time as they brought Limahon, prisoner or dead, the which being done, then shall the friendshippe be con∣cluded which they doo pretende, and to remaine and preach at their will. With this answere they remained without all hope to remayne there, and did incontinent prepare themselues for to depart from Manilla, and bought manie bookes to carie with them, wherein was comprehended all the secrets of that king∣dome. By reason whereof they might giue large notice vnto the royall maiestie of king Phillip. The which being vnder∣stoode by the Uiceroy, who had set spies to watch their doings, did sende them worde that they should not trouble themselues in the buying of bookes, for that hee would giue them frée∣ly all such bookes as they would desire to haue: the which af∣terwardes he did not accomplish: whether it was for forget∣fulnesse or other occasion, as wee haue more at large declared vnto you, we know not: yet did the Uiceroy send and deman∣ded to sée some of those bookes that the Fryers had bought, who after that he had séene them, did returne them again, and reque∣sted of them some writing of their owne handes, who did accō∣plish his request, and sent them written in spanish and in their owne language, the Lords prayer, the aue maria, and the ten commandements, who according vnto the relation of him that did carrie the same, saide, that after hee had reade it, he made showes that he receiued great content therewith, and said that all which was there written was good.

In the time that they stayed in this Citie, amongst all other

things that they vnderstoode, to driue away the time was one, it was giuen them to vnderstande that in one of the prisons, there was a Portingale prisoner, who was taken in a shippe of the Iapones with others of his nation, who were all dead in the prison, and none left aliue but he alone. Our people being verie desirous for to see him, and to learne of him some secrets of that countrie, for that he had béene there a great while, they did procure to talke with him, asking licence of the supreme Iudge and lieutenant vnto the viceroy, who did not onely re∣fuse to grant it them, but did make diligent inquirie who they were that did giue them to vnderstande thereof, for to punish them, which without all doubt, should be executed with sharpe and seuere punishment. Yet our people would neuer tell them of whom they had it, although it was demanded of them di∣uerse times, and with great intreatie. They had so great desire to know it, that they did vse all meanes possible as it appeared in the boldnesse of their demandes.

CHAP. XXVII. There came newes vnto Aucheo that there was a rouer vp∣on the coast of Chincheo, which did much harme, and had sacked a towne. The viceroy doth suspect him to be Limahon, and how that our people with Omoncon and Sinsay, had not declared vnto him the truth.

THe Spaniards remained in the Citie of Aucheo twentie days, in the order as hath béen told you, without any hope, that the religious fathers should remaine in that countrie for to preach the holy gospell, which was the principall occasi∣on of their going into that kingdome. Upon a suddaine there came newes vnto the citie that the rouer Limahon was vpon the coast of Chincheo vsing his olde accustomed cruelties, and how that he had spoiled and robbed a towne vpon the sea coast. This newes was throughout all the citie, and appeared to be true, touching the effect of the dead: yet false touching the per∣son, for that the rouer was called Taocay an enimie and con∣trarie vnto Limahon: but a friend vnto Vintoquian, of whom we haue spoken of. But thereupon the viceroy and all them of the citie were conformable in the suspition that they had re∣ceiued,

which was that our people,* 1.41 were come into that king∣dome vpon some euill pretence, and to sée the secrets thereof, to some euil end, which was the occasion y^t frō that time forwards they shewed them not so good countenance as they did before.

These newes was not so soone come, but straightwayes the viceroy did sende for Omoncon (who was then returned from his visiting) and Sinsay vnto whom he had done courtesie, and giuen them the title of Loytias and captaynes, and he did re∣prehende them verie sharpely for that they had brought ouer people thether, and sayde that they had tolde him a lye, in say∣ing that Limahon was besieged, in such sort that hee coulde not escape, neither had the Castillos burnt his shippes, and howe that all was but a made matter amongest themselues, and howe that the Captaines which they brought, and sayde that they had taken from Limahon, they had robbed from other places, with other wordes in the same order, and said that the Spaniardes were spyes that came to discouer the secretes and strength of the kingdome, and how that they had brought them thether by force of giftes that they had giuen them.

They answered him with great humilitie in saying that in all that which they had sayd they did speake the trueth, & that it should appeare at such time as the newes of the rouer should be better knowen, the which if it shall appeare to be contrary, they were there readie for to suffer whatsoeuer punishment y^t shold be giuen them. The viceroy being somewhat satisfied with this their iustification, bad them to depart, remitting all things vn∣to time for the true declaration thereof. Then Omoncon and Sinsay came straightwayes to giue y^e Spaniards to vnderstand of all that had passed with the viceroy, & what they vnderstoode of him, which caused in thē so great feare, y^t for the time which it indured (which was till such time as they vnderstoode the truth as aforesaide) they paied very well for their feasts & ban∣kets the which they had made them. All this happened in the time that Omoncon & Sinsay were at variance, and spake ma∣ny iniurious words the one of y^e other, discouering their intents & deuises, whereby it plainely appeared that in al y^t which they had tolde vnto the viceroy, they lied, but in especiall Omon∣con. Sinsay did dissemble, for hee sayde and tolde vnto all people, that by his order and industrie, our people did

fire the shippes of Lymahon, and besieged him, with other spée∣ches in the like sort, yet twentie daies before his comming the∣ther, all was ended and doone, as appeared. The occasion of their enimitie and falling out, was for that the viceroy had gi∣uen vnto Omoncon a title and charge of more honor then vn∣to Sinsay hauing made betwixt them a consort that the reward or dignitie should be equally deuided betwixt them, and that the one should speake of the other the best they could, because the viceroy should do them friendship. This condition and consort (as appeareth) was euill performed by Omoncon be∣ing addicted vnto selfe loue, and séemed vnto him that Sinsay did not deserue so much as he did, for that hee was a base man, and of the sea, and he of the more nobilitie, and had the office of a captaine. All this which I haue said, was the occasion y^t the truth came to light betwixt them, and to cause the viceroye to suspect, that as they lyed in this, they might also fable in the burning of the ships and besieging of Limahon.

CHAP. XXVIII. The Gouernors of ••••e prouince do assemble together, to intreat of the Spaniardes busines, and are resolued, that they should returne vnto the Ilandes. They do see many curious thinges before their departure.

WIth this griefe and care remained the Spaniards cer∣taine daies kept close in their lodgings, and were not visited so often as they were whē they first came thether, which did augment verie much their feare, till such time as they vn∣derstoode that the viceroy eyther of his owne good will, or else by some particular order from the king & his counsell, had cal∣led together all the gouernours of that prouince of Aucheo to intreat of matters touching Limahō, as also in particular, why & wherefore the Spaniards came thether, & to resolue thēselues wholly in all things requisite for the same. So when that they were all come together, which was in a short time, & amongst them the Gouernor of Chincheo, who by an other name was called Insuanto, they had particular méetings together with the Uiceroye, in the which they were all agréed to haue a ge∣nerall méeting, whereunto should bee called the Castillos,

and to demande of them in publike audience the cause of their comming (although notwithstanding they had giuen to vnder∣stand thereof vnto the Insuanto and vizroy) and being hearde, to giue them their answere according as they had determined: for the which vppon a day appointed they met all togither (but not the vizroy) in the house of the Cagontoc, and commanded to come before them the Castillas, who did accomplish their re∣quest with a great good will, for that they vnderstoode that they were called to entreat of their matter, either to tarry or depart. So when they came thither, they were commanded to enter in∣to a mighty hall, whereas they were all set in verie rich chaires with great grauitie and maiestie. The Insuanto séemed to bée the chiefest amongst them, but whether it was for that hée was the principallest next vnto the vizroy (or as it was tolde them) for that it was he that sent Omoncon in the chase of the rouer Limahon they knew not, but so soone as they were entred into the hall, they were commanded to drawe nigh, there, whereas they were all placed, without bidding them to sit downe, nei∣ther did they vse any particular circumstances or curtesie.

The Insuanto tooke vpon him the charge, and demanded of the Spaniards (by meanes of the interpreter) what was the occasion of their comming into that country, and to declare their pretence, for that they would giue vnto them the resolute will of the vizroy, at whose commandement they were called and there assembled togither. The Spaniards answered vnto their request and said that their comming thither was to treat with them peace and friendship, by the order of the gouernor of y^e Philippinas, who had his authority from the king of Spaine, with a particular charge euer since the said Ilands were disco∣uered, who in all thinges that possible hath béene, haue shewed themselues not onely in words but in déedes, as vnto this day the gouernor dooth accomplish the same, in ransoming all such Chinos as they can finde, or come vnto their powers, and send them home frée into their countrie with giftes, and not in this only, but in other matters, which is not vnknowne vnto them: and more, that which lastly had happened in the destruction of the fléete, and the besieging of the rouer Limahon, with which newes they came ••hither to intreate and conclude betwéene them and the Castillias a perpetuall friendship: this was the

principall occasion of their comming, the which if they coulde bring it to passe (as a thing that did accomplish both the one and the other) they would with y^e same news send word with the souldiers (who came with them for the same effect) vnto the gouernor of Manilla, who sent vs thither for that he might send the good successe thereof to the king of Spaine, and there to re∣maine in such place as they woulde appoint them to studie the learning of the language, and to preach & declare to them y^e ho∣ly gospell, which was the right way vnto the saluation of their soule. Unto all the which they gaue attentiue eare, although with little desire to see the experience, as appeared, for that the chiefest matter in effect, they did let passe, and asked of them in what order they left the rouer Limahon, and whether hée might escape or not, and other questions touching the same matter which endured a good while without touching of anie other matter in effect. The Spaniards answered as they thought, and supposed, that at that time it could not be, but that he was either taken prisoner or slaine.

Then did the Insuanto conclude his spéech in saying vnto them that they should returne vnto their owne country to the Ilands, and at such time as they did bring Limahon, they woulde conclude all things touching the friendship they reque∣sted, as also for the preaching of the gospell.

So with this last resolution they tooke their leaue and went vnto their lodging with pretence not to speake more of that matter, for that they sawe it booted not: after they had giuen their censure: and againe, as they vnderstood it was by speciall order from the king and his counsaile, and therewith they be∣ganne to put all thinges in good order for their departure, the which they greatly desired, for that they saw little fruite to pro∣céede of their great labour and trauell, as also to sée themselues cleare of that manner of prison in the which they were, not to go forth of their lodgings without expresse licence.

So from that day forwards they did procure with all haste for to depart, and gaue the vizroy to vnderstande thereof, who answered them and saide, that they should comfort themselues and receiue ioy and pleasure, and that he would dispatch them, so soone as the visitor of that prouince was come to Aucheo, which would bee within tenne dayes, for that hee had written

vnto him, that he should not dispatch them vntil his comming, for that he would sée them.

From that day forwards hee commaunded that sometimes they should let them to go forth abrode to recreate themselues, and that they should shew vnto them some particular pleasure or friendship. So one of them was carried to sée the mustering of their men of warre, which they haue in a common custome throughout all the kingdome to doo it the first day of ••he newe moone, and is sure a thing to be séene: and they do it in the field which is ioyning vnto the wals of the citie, in this manner fol∣lowing.

There were ioyned togither litle more or lesse then 20. thou∣sand souldiers, pickemen and hargabus shot,* 1.42 who were so ex∣pert, that at the sounde of the drum or trumpet, they straight∣wayes put themselues in battle aray, and at another sound in a squadron, and at another the shot doo deuide themselues from the rest, and discharge their péeces with very gallant and good order, and with a trice put themselues againe into their places or standings: this being doone, the picke men came foorth and gaue the assalt altogether with so good order & consort, that it sée∣med vnto the Spaniards that they did excéed al the warlike or∣ders vsed in all the world: and if it were so that their stoma••ks and hardinesse were equall vnto their dexteritie and number of people, it were an easie thing for them to conquer the dominion of all the world. If it so chance that any souldier should lacke in his office, & not repaire to his place appointed,* 1.43 he is straight∣wayes punished very cruelly, which is the occasion that euerie one of them hath a care vnto his charge.* 1.44

This their mus••••r endured foure houres, and it was certifi••d vnto the Spainiards that the same day and houre it is done in oll citties and townes throughout all the whole kingdome, al∣though they are without suspection of enimies.

Fiue and twentie dayes after that the Insuanto had giuen the resolute answere vnto the Spaniards, came the visitor thi∣ther: and the whole citie went forth to receiue him, who entred in with so great maiestie, that if they had not knowne who hée was, they could not haue béene perswaded but that he had beene the king.

So the next day following the Spaniards went to visite

him, for dueties sake, as also for that he had a desire to sée them They found him in his lodging, where he began to make visi∣tation of the cittie.

In their courtes were an infinite number of people which came thither with petitions and complaintes, but in the halles within, there was none but his seruants and sergeants. When that any came for to present his petition, the porter that was at the entrie made a great noise in manner of an .o. est. for that it was a good way from the place whereas the visitor did sit, then commeth forth straightwayes one of his pages, and taketh the petition and carrieth it in vnto him. At this time it was told him how that the Castillas were there: hee commaunded that they should enter, and talked with them a few words, but with great curtesie, and all was touching the imprisonment of Limahon without making any mention of their departure or tarrying. So after a while that he had beholded them and their apparel, hee tooke his leaue of them, saying, that by reason of the great businesse he had in that visitation, he could not shewe them any curtesie, neither to vnderstande of them what their request and desire was, but gaue them great thankes for their curtesie shewed, in that they woulde come to visite him. Hee was set in the same visitation after the same manner and order as they founde the gouernor of Chincheo, and the vizroy, with a table before him, with paper, ynke, and other thinges readie to write, the which according as it was giuen them to vnder∣stand, is a common vse in all y^e kingdome, vsed with al Iudges, whether it be for sentence of death, or other matters of iustice, as hath béene told you many times before.

Thrée dayes after the visitor was come thither, the Insuan∣to departed for his owne house, with order that with all spéede possible he should ordaine shippes wherin the Castillias should returne vnto the Philippinas.

Likewise the same day, all those that were there assembled by the order of the vizroy departed vnto their owne houses. And the Spaniards were commanded for to s••ay vntill the full of the moone, which should bee the twentith of August, and that day they shoulde take their leaue of them: for on that day a∣mongst them it is holden for good to beginne any thing whatso∣euer.* 1.45 Wherein they doo vse great superstition, and doo make

many banquets, as vppon newyeares day, as hath béene tolde diffusedly.

The day before y^e departure of y^e Spaniards, there came some in behalfe of the vizroy to inuite them, and made them banquet in the order and fashion as at the first: although this (for that it was at their departure) was more sumptuous, wherein was represented a comedie which was very excellent & good, whose argument was first declared vnto them as followeth.

There was a young man newly married, and there chanced difference betwixt him and his wife, hee determined to go vn∣to certaine warres, the which was ordained in a countrie not farre from that whereas he dwelled: whose acts and déeds was therein so valorous, that the king did shewe him great fauour, and being fully certified of his worthinesse, he sent him for chief Captaine of the most importunate enterprises that might bée offered, who did accomplish his charge with conclusion thereof with great content and satisfaction to the king and his coun∣sailers: for the which he made him his captaine generall, and in his absence did commit vnto his charge his whole campe, with the same authoritie that he had himselfe.

The warres being doone, and hee hauing a desire to returne vnto his owne countrie and house, there was giuen vnto him thrée cart loads of golde, and many iewels of an inestimable price, with the which hee entered into his owne countrie with great honour and riches, wheras they receiued him with great honour.

All the which they did represent so naturally, & with so good apparell and personages, that it séemed a thing to passe in act. There was not in this banket the vizroy, but those captaines which were there the first time: and another captaine vnto whome was giuen the charge to bring the Spaniards vnto Manilla, who was called Chautalay, a principall Captaine of that prouince.

So when the banquet was ended, they were carried with great company from the hall whereas the banquet was made, vnto the house of the Cogontoc, who was the kings tresuror and dwelt there hard by, of whom they were maruellously wel receiued, with louing words and great curtesie: in saying that he hoped very shortly to sée them againe, at such time as they

shall returne with Limahon, and that as then their friendship should be fully concluded, and would intreat with them in par∣ticular of other matters. This being doone he gaue vnto them a present for to carrie vnto the gouernor of Manilla in recom∣pence of that which was sent vnto the vizroy: the present was fortie péeces of silke and twenty péeces of Burato a litter chaire and guilt, and two Quitasoles of silke, and a horse. Likewise he sent the like present vnto the generall of the fielde, and to either of th••m a letter in particular: these things were put in chestes which were very faire and guilt. Besides this hee gaue other fortie peeces of silke of all colours for to bée part••d amongst the Captaines and other officers that were at the siege of Lima∣hon with thrée hundred blacke mantles and as many Quita∣soles to be parted amongst the souldiers. Besides all these, hée gaue vnto the friers ech of them eight péeces of silke, and vnto the souldiers their companions foure péeces of ech of them,* 1.46 and to euery one his horse and a Quitasol of silke, their h••rse were verie good to trauell by the way: this being done the Cogon∣toc tooke his leaue of them, and willed them to go and take leaue and licence of the vizroy and the visitor, that they might depart, for that all thinges were in a redinesse for their voyage: the which commandement they did straightwayes accomplish, being very well content and satisfied of the great fauours and curtesies, the which they receiued both of the one and the other: Likewise of the Totoc who is captaine generall, whome they also did visite & tooke their leaue. These visitations and leaue ta∣king being doone, they returned vnto their lodging with great desire for to toke their ease, whereas they remained til the next day following, wherin they departed vnto the port of Tansuso, after they had remained in Aucheo seuen and forty daies.

CHAP. XXIX. The Spaniards departe from Aucheo, and come vnto Chincheo, wheras the Insuanto was: he commanded thē to depart vnto the port of Tansuso, whither he went him∣self for to dispatch them: at whose departure, he sheweth great fauor and maketh them great feastes.

THe Spaniards departed from the Citie of Aucheo vpon a Tewsday, being the 23. of August in the sight of all the

people of the Citie, who came foorth to sée them with so great presse and thronge, as they did when they first came thither in∣to the countrie: they were al carried in litter chaires, yea their verie slaues, for that it was so commaunded by the vizroy: the Friers were carried by eight men a péece, and the souldiers by foure men a péece, and all their seruants and slaues were caried by two men a péece. Looke so many men as was to carrie them, there went so many more to help them when they waxed wea∣ry, besides foure and twentie that carried their stuffe. There went alwayes before thē a harbinger for to prouide their lodg∣ings, & with him went a paimaster, whose charge was to ordain & prouide men for to cary their litter chaires, & to giue them for their trauell that which is accustomed, & to pay all costs & char∣ges spent by the Spaniard. After that they departed from Au∣cheo they made of two daies iourney one, which was y^e occasi∣on that they came to Chincheo in foure daies. At their entring into the citie they found a seruant of the Insuanto, with order & commandemēt, that they shuld proceed forwards on their iour∣ney, & not to stay in the citie, but to go vnto the port of Tansuso, whither he wil come the next day following. They obayed his cōmandement, & made so much haste y^t in two dayes they came vnto the village of Tangoa, wheras they had bin before, & par∣ticular mention made thereof. In the same village they were lodged, wel entertained and had great good chéere: from thence they went in one day to Tansuso, which was y^e first port wher∣as they did disembarke thēselues, when as they came from the Ilands vnto that firme land: the Iustice of the town did lodge them in y^e same house whereas they were first lodged, & did pro∣uide for them of all things necessary & néedfull, & that in aboun∣dance, til y^e comming of the Insuanto, which was within foure dayes after, for that he could not come any sooner (although his desire was) for that it was very foule weather.

The next day after his comming thither which was y^e thirde of September, he sent and commanded the Spaniards that they should imbarke themselues, for that it was that day the coniun∣ction of the moone (although at that time y^e ships were not fu••ly in a redines.) They obayed his commandement, & the Insuanto himself went to the water side, in whose presence came thither certain religious men of their maner, & after their fashion they

made sacrifice with certain Orations and praiers, in the which they craued of the heauens to giue good and faire weather, and a sure voyage and fauorable seas vnto al those that saile in those shippes.

This ceremony being done (which is a thing very much vsed in that countrie) the Spaniards went vnto the Insuanto, who was there with great company and maiestie: hee entertained them very friendly and with chéerefull words making an out∣ward shew that hee bare them great loue, and that their depar∣ture was vnto him a great griefe. Then hee requested them to giue him a remembrance of such thinges as was necessarie and néedfull for their prouision for the sea, for that hee woulde giue order for the prouiding of the same, the which he did, and was with so great aboundance that they had for the voyage, and re∣mained a great deale to spare. Hee then commaunded to bee brought thither cates to eat, and drinke, and gaue it them with his owne hands, as well the one as the other: hee himselfe did eate and drinke with them, which is the greatest fauour that can be shewed amongst them.

The banquet being ended, he commaunded them in his pre∣sence to go abord their shippes, because that was a luckie day, and also to accomplish that which the vizroy had commaunded, which was that they should not depart from thence, vntil they had first séene them imbarked. The Spaniards obeyed the com∣mandement, and tooke their leaue of the Insuanto with great curtesie and reuerence, and with outward shewes that they remained indebted for the great curtesie and good will that they had receiued: and therewith they departed to the waters side, towards the boat which was tarrying for them.

As they passed by the religious men (that before we spake of) they saw a great table set,* 1.47 and vppon it a whole Oxe with his throte cut, and hard by the same a Hogge and a Goate, & other thinges to bee eaten: the which they had ordained for to make sacrifice, which they do vse in the like affaires.

They being imbarked in the boate, they were carried aborde the Admirall, which was the shippe appointed for them to go in: then presently they beganne to stirre the shippe, from one place vnto another with certain boates and cables which they had there readie for the same purpose. The shippe did not so

soone begin to moue, but the religious men a shore did beginne their sacrifice, the which did indure vntill night, ending their feastes and triumphes in putting forth of the cittie, and vppon their gates many cressets and lights. The souldiers shot off all their hargabushes, and the ships that were in the port shot off all their artilerie, and on the shore a great noise of droms and bels: all the which being ended and done, the Spaniards went a shore againe vnto their lodging: but first the Insuanto was departed vnto his owne house, with all the company that hee brought with him.

The next day the sayd Insuanto did inuite them vnto a ban∣ket, which was as famous as any which had bene made them vnto that time. He was at the banquet himselfe, and the Cap∣taine generall of all that prouince. There was aboundance of meates and many pretie deuises to passe away the time, which made the banquet to indure more then foure houres: the which being done, there was brought forth the present which the In∣suanto did sende vnto the gouernor of Manilla in returne of that which was sent to him. The present was fourtéene pieces of silke for the gouernor of Manilla, and tenne péeces for the generall of the field: hee also commanded to be giuen vnto the Friers each of them foure péeces, and vnto the souldiers each of them two péeces, and vnto their seruants and slaues certaine painted mantels, and there with he tooke his leaue of them very friendly, and gaue vnto them letters, the which hee had wrote vnto the gouernor, & vnto the general of the field, answere vnto those, the which they had wrote vnto him, & said that all things necessarie for their departure was in a redinesse, with victuals for ten monethes put a bord their ships, so that when as winde and wether did serue they might depart. Also that if in their voyage it should so fall out, that any of the Chinos that went in their shippes, shoulde do vnto them any euill, either abr••de or at the Ilands: that the gouernor therof should punish them at his pleasure, and how that the vizroy will thinke well there∣of: in conclusion he saide vnto them, that hee hoped to sée them there againe verie shortly, and to returne againe with Lima∣hon, and then hee woulde supplie the wantes which nowe they lacked. The Spaniards did kisse his hands, and said, that they had receiued in curtesie more then they deserued, & that in

all thinges, there did abound and not lacke, that they remained greatly indetted vnto him for their friendship, and would giue their king notice thereof, that whensoeuer occasion shoulde bee offered, to repay them with the like: and therewith the Insu∣anto departed to his owne house, leauing in the companie of the Spaniards fiue captaines, those which should go with them in their company to sea, and also Omoncon and Sinsay, who were that day in the banquet, with the habite and ensigne of Loytias, for that the day before it was giuen vnto them by the Insuanto.

Upon Wednesday which was the fourtéenth of September the wind came faire, wherewith they hoised vp their sailes and went to sea: at their departure there was at the waters side the Insuanto and the Iustice of Chincheo to sée them saile, the which Insuanto had conceiued so great loue and friendship of the Castillas, that when he saw them depart, he shedde great a∣boundance of teares, as was affirmed by diuers Chinos that saw it, to which the Spaniards gaue credite vnto, for that they knew him to be a maruellous louing person, and humaine, of a good condition, and of a gallant personage, and did excéede all other that they had séene in all the time of their being in that prouince.

CHAP. XXX. The Spaniardes departe from the port of Tansuso to∣wards the Ilandes Philippinas, and euery day they doo harbor themselues in Ilands by the way, declaring what they saw in them.

BEing departed out of the port as aforsaide, the Spani∣ards deuided themselues into two shippes, to wit, the two Friers and Michael de Loarcha, Omoncon and thrée other captaines in one shippp. And Peter Sarmiento, Nicholas de Quenca and Iohn▪ de Triana, Sinsay and all their souldiers in another ship, with eight other ships of warre which went with them for their safegard: they sailed forwards directing their course towards a small Iland that was not farre off, with de∣termination there to take water for their ships, for that it had in it many riuers of very swéete water. Within a smal space they

ariued there, and it had a very faire and sure port, wherein might ride in securitie a great Nauy of ships. All Thursday they were there recreating and sporting themselues, for that it was a pleasant Ilande, and full of fresh riuers. Uppon Friday being the sixtéenth of September, the day being somwhat spēt, they made saile and tooke port foure leagues from that place in another Ilande called Laulo, for to put themselues in a newe course different and contrary vnto that which they brought when as they came vnto that kingdome, for that the Chinos had by experience prooued, that in those monethes the windes were more fauorable then in other monethes, and for the most part North and Northeast winds: al that night they remained in that Iland, and the next day following they sailed vnto ano∣ther Iland which was called Chautubo, not farre distant from that of Laulo. This Ilande was full of little townes, one of them was called Gautin which had fiue fortes of towers made of lime and stone, verie thicke and strongly wrought: they were all foure square, and sixe fatham high, and were made of pur∣pose for to receiue into them al the people of those little townes to defend themselues from rouers and théeues that daylie come on that coast. These fortes were made with battlements as we do vse with space betwixt them: and for that the forme and fashion of their building did like them verie well, they were desirous to sée that if within them there were anie curious mat∣ter to bée séene, wherewith they bent their artilerie towards them, and went a shoore. But when they which had the gard•• and kéeping off did sée them comming, they did shut the gates, and woulde not consent that they shoulde satisfie their desire, for any intreating or promises that they could make.

They verie much noted, that although this Ilande were rockie and sandie, yet was it tilled and sowed full of Rice, Wheate, and other séedes and graine. There was in it great store of Kine and Horse,* 1.48 and they vnderstoode that they were gouerned, not by one particular man, to whom they were sub∣iect, neither by any other amongst themselues, nor of Chi∣na, but in common: yet notwithstanding they liued in great peace and quietnesse, for that euerie one did content himselfe with his owne. Uppon sunday in the afternoone they departed from this Ilande, and sailed their course all

that night, and the next morning they ariued at another Iland called Corchu, which was twentie leagues from the port of Tansuso from whence they departed. The Spaniards séeing what leasure they tooke in this their voyage, they requested the Captaines to commaunde the marriners that they shoulde not enter into so many portes or harbors, for that they had no certaintie of the weather, and not to detract the time, but to take oportunitie before that contrarie weather do come: for to saile in that order it seemed more for recreation then to achiue or obtaine a voyage. The Captaines answered, and requested them to haue patience, for that in making their iournies as they did, they doo accomplish and follow the order set downe by the vizroy and Insuanto, who did expressely commaunde them with great charge for to direct their Nauigation by those Ilands with great deliberation and consideration, because they might in safetie and health ariue at Manilla.

The same day the North winde beganne to blowe verie strongly: in such sort, that they thought it not good to go forth of that harbor (as well for that aforesaid,* 1.49 to be commanded to the contrarie) as also for that the Chinos are very searefull of the sea, and men that are not accustomed to ingulfe themselues too farre, neither to passe anie stormes.

Néere vnto this Iland there was another somewhat bigger, which is called Ancon, wholly dispeopled and without anie dwellers, yet a better countrie and more profitable for to sowe and reape then that of Corchu. The Spaniards being at an anker there, vnderstood by the Chinos that in times past it was very well inhabited, vnto the which ariued a great fléete be∣longing to the king of China, & by a great storme were all cast away vpon the same: the which losse and destruction being vn∣derstood by another generall that had the guard of that cost, su∣specting that the dwellers thereof had done that slaughter, he came to the shore and slew many of the inhabitants, and caried all the rest in their ships vnto the firme lande, who afterwards would neuer returne thither againe, although they gaue them licence after that they vnderstoode the truth of that successe: so that vnto that time it remained dispeopled and full of wilde swine, of the broode that remained there at such time as they were slaine and caried away as you haue heard.

This Iland and the rest adioyning thereunto (which are ve∣ry many) haue very excellent and sure ports and hauens, with great store of fish. These Ilands endured vntill they came vn∣to a little gulfe, which is fiue and fortie leagues ouer, and is sailed in one day, and at the ende thereof is the port of Ca∣bite, which before we haue spoken off, and is neere vnto Ma∣nilla.

So when that winde and weather serued their turne, they departed from the Iland of Ancon, and sailed til they came vn∣to another Ilande called Plon, whereas they vnderstoode by a shippe that was there a fishing, howe that the rouer Limahon was escaped, wheras he was besieged at Pagansinan: the man∣ner and forme of the policie hee vsed therein shalbe told you in the chapter following.

CHAP. XXXI. They haue news how that the rouer Limahon was escaped, and howe that he was in an Ilande there hard by: some gaue iudgement to go and set vpon him, but they resol∣ued themselues to the contrarie, and follow the voyage to Manilla.

BEing at an anker in the Iland of Plon, tarrying for a wind to followe their voyage, with great desire to come thither whereas they might vnderstande what had happened vnto Li∣mahon, at the same time entred into the saide harbor a shippe with fishermen, they beléeuing that hee had béene one of the Ilands, they went vnto him and asked of whence they were, and from whence they came, and what newes they coulde say of Limahon (who was knowne vnto them all, either by some harme that they had receiued, or else by report of others that had receiued hurt.) These fishermen gaue them particular and whole relation, by the which they vnderstoode that Limahon was fledde and not perceiued by the Spaniards: he escaped in certaine barkes, the which he caused to be made very secretlie within his forte, of such timber and bords as remained of his shippes that were burnt, the which was brought in by night by his souldiers, on that side of the fort which was next vnto the riuer, and were not discouered by the Castillas, which

which were put there with all care and diligence to kéepe the mouth that no succour might come in to helpe them. And to∣wards the land there whereas he might escape, they were with out all suspection (they were so strong) and did not mistrust that any such thing shoulde bee put in vre, as afterwards did fal out, the which was executed with so great policie and craft, that when they came to vnderstande it, the rouer was cleane gone, and in sauegard, caulking his barkes at the Ilande of Tocaotican, the better for to escape and saue himselfe, and they saide that it was but eight dayes past that hee fledde.

With this newes they all receiued great alteration, but in especiall▪ Omoncon and Sinsay, who returned vnto the Spa∣niards and saide, that the escaping of the rouer is not without some misterie, and that it coulde not bee done without the will and knowledge of the Spaniards, and that the rouer had giuen vnto the generall of the fielde some great gifts for to let him go, for that otherwise it were a thing impossible for him to escape, being besieged as hee was, although the Spaniards had slept: the Spaniards did giue their discharge in such prouable maner, that the captaines of China were satisfied of the false opinion they had receiued, as afterwards they were fully perswaded when they came to the cittie of Manilla and heard the generall of the fielde and other captaines and souldiers that were at t••e siege. This Iland of Tocaotican whereas the rouer was men∣ding and caulking of his barkes, was distant from the Ilande of Plon, whereas the Spaniards were, onely twelue leagues, and being by sea it séemed to be lesse, for that very plainely you might see the one Ilande from the other. The which with the great cholor that Omoncon and Sinsay had for the escaping of the rouer, as also with the feare they receiued in that which might happen vnto them by reason hereof at their returne vn∣to China, which at the least might bée to take away (to their great shame) the titles of Loytias, which was giuen them in that respect, did cause their stomakes and mindes to rise, and to séeke occasion to go and fight with him, for that it séemed vnto them they should get victorie with great ease, for that hee was vnprouided and wearied with the long time of his siege. Being in this determination there came vnto them the Captaine that was appointed generall ouer them, and saide that the vizroy of

Aucheo and the gouernor of Chincheo had sent them onely to carrie those Spaniards vnto Manilla, and to bring with him a∣liue or deade the rouer Limahon, if they woulde giue him vnto them, and that hee woulde not digresse from this order by no manner of m••anes, neither could they, if that they w••re so dis∣posed, for that the shippes were pestered with the horses: and againe, their people they had brought with them▪ was more for to saile and gouerne their shippes then for the sight. Moreouer the sight would be very dangerous for that it was euident that the rouer and his companions, would rather ••e al slaine then to yeelde themselues in any respect, and for to put such an enter∣prise in effect, it were requisite to haue both ships and men, and not to go so vnprouided and pestred as they were. All which reasons being considered, they were all conformable vnto the opinion of the Generall, and determined that so soone as winde and weather did serue, to set saile and to passe the gulfe for to go vnto Manilla, whither as they were bound, and not to come vnto the Ilande of Tocaotican whereas the rouer was.

So after they had remained thrée wéekes in that harbour de∣tained with a mightie North winde, that neuer calmed night nor day in all that time. The eleuenth day of October two houres before day, they set saile and went to sea. By reason of this great wind there was not one shippe of all th••se that were in the port of Plon coulde go foorth to giue any notice vnto the rouer, of the going of the Spaniards, neither of the captaines of China. Sixtéene leagues from the port, sailing towards the South, they discouered a mightie Iland verie high land, which was called Tangarruan, and was of thrée score leagues about, all inhabited with people like vnto those of the Ilands Philip∣pinas: they passed hard by it in the night, with a s••iffe Norwe••t winde, which was the occasion that the shippe wherein the Friers went, was constrained to go to sea, and the other nine which were in their companie for their safegarde, shrowded themselues hard vnder the Iland, by reason whereof they were so farre separated the one from the other, that in the morning they coulde not sée them. They were in great da••ger, because that night there was a great storme of winde, in the which they lost the rudder of their shippe, and almost without any hope to escape the fury thereof.

Being in this extremitie, they commended themselues with contrite hearts vnto almightie God, and put their shippe before the sea, vntill such time as they had supplied their rudder, the which they did, although with great trauell and labour: then straightwayes it was the will of God that this contrary wind was somewhat calmed and his furie abated, and a prosperous winde fauoured them, so that vppon sunday in the morning being the seuentéenth day of October they discouered the Iland of Manilla of them greatly desired, yet could they not reach vn∣to it vntill saint Simon and Iudes day: by reason that they returned backe vnto the ri••er of Pagansinan to séeke the other nine shippes, for that it was concluded amongst them, that if it should so fall out, they to be separated in any storme, that they should come vnto that riuer, and to méete togither as they did.

So they departed from thence vnto the port of Buliano, & not entring therin, the captaine Omoncon did set a man on shore, one that could speake the language of that Iland, and gaue him charge to informe himselfe of all that had happened with the rouer Limahon, for at that time he could not beléeue that which had béene told him. Untill such time as he returned the shippes being without at the sea, did play vnder fore sailes, who did declare vnto them the verie same thing, the which was tolde them at the Ilande of Plon without faultring any point: the which caused Omoncon and Sinsay to receiue much more griefe then they did, when they heard the first newes, for as then they were doubtfull of the truth. The Spanyards as then suspected that they would haue returned vnto the firme lande, and not haue gone vnto Manilla, but to haue left them there all alone vpon that Iland. But it fell not out as they suspec∣ted: For although that Omoncon and Sinsay did make an outward shew to doo it, and sayde that they would sende the Spanyards in a shippe, for that as then they were out of all danger, and in sight of Manilla: yet was the Generall of a contrarie opinion, and sayd, that for no manner of occasion that might happe•• hee would not differ one point from the order which was giuen vnto him, and therewith they sayled towards the Iland that they so long desired to sée, and came thither the twentie eight day of October, ss aforesaid.

So that from the port of Tansuso which is the first port of Chi∣na till they came vnto the Iland of Manilla they were fiue and fortie dayes, and is not in all full two hundred leagues,* 1.50 which may bee made with reasonable wether in tenne dayes at the most.

CHAP. XXXII. The captaines Chinos ariued with the Spaniardes at the ci∣tie of Manilla, the Gouernor and those of the citie doo receiue them with great ioy and triumphes, and after they had remained there certaine dayes, they returned vnto the firme land, being instructed and satisfied of ma∣ny things touching our holy catholike faith, with great desire to receiue the same.

AFter that it was knowen vnto the Gouernor of the citie of Manilla and vnto the generall of the fielde as also vnto the rest of the captaines and souldiers of the ariuall of the Spa∣niardes, whom they with great care desired to heare of, as well for the particular loue they deare vnto them as also for to vn∣derstand and heare the newes from that mightie kingdome of China, to be declared by witnesses of so great faith and credite. They altogether went foorth to receiue them with great ioye and pleasure, and likewise all such captaynes and souldiers as came in their companie.

They were straightwaies conueighed vnto their lodginges to rest themselues of their long iourney which they had by sea, for it was requisite and néedefull: for the which afterwardes there was great feastes and bankets, which was made by the Gouernor, the generall of the field and other particular persons vnto the Chinos, in recompence of that which was done vnto the Spaniards in their countrie.

All which feastes did giue them little content when as they did remember the flying and escape of the Rouer, but in especi∣all Omoncon and Sinsay, who continually & euery moment did call vpon the generall of their fleete to make haste & to shor∣ten the time that they might depart from the firme land, where giuing notice vnto the Gouernor of Chincheo of the estate of Limahon, he might giue order that before he had reedified and

repayred himselfe they might take him (which is a thing most desired in all that kingdome). The generall was verie glad, and reioyced of their good intertainement, and answered vnto Omoncon & Sinsay, saying that by reason of the great storme and foule weather past, their ships had great néede of reparati∣on, and likewise the marriners to ease themselues, the which being done he would with all his heart depart.

The generall of the fielde was verie sorrowfull and much gréeued for that the Rouer Limahon was so escaped, and the more when he vnderstoode that he was suspected that hee did consent vnto his departure: for which occasion, if that the Cap∣taynes had not béene verie much wearied with the long siege, and euill weather which happened in that time, without all doubt he would haue followed him, and neuer to haue left him till he had taken or slaine him.

Although they were fully perswaded that Limahon was so terrified with the great perill and danger in the which he was, and againe with so small number of people, that rather hee would desire to put himselfe in securitie then to offende or doo any harme, neyther to put himselfe in any place whereas hee might receiue damage of any of them to whom hee had doone so open wrong (who were so much desirous to be reuenged) who for to preuent all that might happen (as after we vnder∣stoode) hauing made readie his barkes and boates which he or∣dayned in his fort, and put in them victualles for their iour∣ney, he departed with his small number of people, vnto an I∣lande farre••off and vnknowen, there whereas he vnderstoode that none would goe to séeke him, and there hee remayned a time whereas he fell sicke of a melancholicke infirmitie which grewe by an imagination that hee had, to remember in what state he was at that time, and howe he had séene himselfe at o∣ther times feared throughout al the kingdome of China, which was an imagination sufficient for to bring him to his ende: his companions were dispersed abroad, so that we neuer heard more of them.

Now returning to our purpose, after that the China Cap∣taines had recreated them selues with the feastes and sportes that was made vnto them, and taken recreation many dayes, and tarryed hoping that the weather would proue fayrer to

prepare themselues to depart. In the same time they did in∣treat of many thinges in particular touching Christian religi∣on, whereof with great care they did informe themselues of our religious men, and tolde them some secret things that were vnknowen vnto them of their countrie, for that they were strangers.

So when as time and weather did serue, they did take their leaue, with many signes and tokens of griefe for to depart and leaue the conuersation of so good companions, and did promise vnto them to procure all that was possible that the friendshippe begunne betwixt them and the Chinos, should continue and perseuer, for that it was a thing that did content them all.

Their generall himselfe did take this particular charge vn∣to himselfe, with a determinate purpose for to declare in effect to the Gouernour of Aucheo (whose priuate seruant he was) the good meaning of the Castillos, and what principall people they were, and the ceremonies they vsed, with the which hee was marueilously in loue. Likewise hee would giue him to vnderstande of the flying of the Rouer Limahon, how and in what manner and order it was, and how that the generall of the field and the other captaines were in no fault thereof. This he would do in respect that if it should so fall out that Omon∣con and Sinsay for their owne credite should declare any thing against the Spaniardes that was not true, that they might not be beléeued.

Besides all this he tolde the Gouernour certaine thinges in secret, how they might with great ease purchase the friendship they pretended. And amongest them all, one was, that hee should make a supplication vnto the catholike king, in reque∣sting him to write a letter vnto their king, and sende him Em∣bassador, and such as shoulde giue vnto them the light of the Catholike and Christian faith, with the which diligence ••here was no doubt, that not onely the friendshippe betwixt the kinges and their subiectes shoulde bee established, but also the king and all his kingdome would receiue the Catholike faith,* 1.51 for that there are manye ceremonies vsed amongest them which doo much resemble those of our Christian reli∣gion, and againe in their liuing morally, they doo obserue in manie thinges the tenne commandementes of Gods lawe,

of the which in particular he did informe himselfe, so that the greatest difficultie was in the entring in of the preaching of the holy gospell, and beeing by this meanes ouer come, in a short time all the whole kingdome would turne Christians. And considering that in their worshipping, as they doo worship all thinges in the seconde essence, with great facilitie they would change their adoration and giue it vnto the first, as most wor∣thie, and vnto whom it is their duties. The generall did adde more thereunto, and saide that he was so much aff••ctioned vn∣to the faith of the Christians, that if it were not that he should be banished and loose his countrie, house and landes, without all doubt he would haue béene baptised: the which he could not do without loosing of all, for that they haue a law in their coun∣trie, the which is obserued and kept inuiolably, by the which it is forbidden that none whatsoeuer, can receiue any strange religion differing from theirs vpon paine of death, without the consent of the king and his counsell.

This law was made to take away nouelties, and to liue all in one vniformitie of religion, with one manner of rites and ceremonies.

This only was the occasion that certaine marchants of Chi∣na being affectioned vnto the law of the gospell, were baptised at the Philippinas, and there doo dwell at this day in the citie of Manilla amongest the Spaniardes, and are become verie good Christians.

So with these offers and with promises to be great friendes vnto the Spaniardes, the Generall departed from Manilla to goe vnto the firme lande, and with him the other Captaynes Omoncon and Sinsay with great hope that verie shortly they should be all of one faith. So the one tooke their leaue of the other with reasons of great affection and tokens of great loue signifying that in any thing that should be offered they should finde them friendly.

They being departed, the Spaniardes remayned verie care∣full in praying vnto the diuine maiestie, desiring of him to di∣rect all thinges in this their request, that it might be to his ho∣ly seruice, and also to inspire the catholike maiestie of king Phillip their Lorde for to sende his Embassador vnto the king of China, offering his friendship, and to admonish him to re∣ceiue

the faith of Christ, the which according vnto the report of the Austen Fryers that entred into that countrie (of whom we haue made mention manie times in this booke with their companions) and also the Generall of China tolde them that there was no other means but only that for to bring their pur∣pose to effect.

This counsell with all the spéede possible they put in vre, and sent vnto his maiestie one of purpose, and in the name of all them of those Ilandes to request him, and to declare how much it did import. They sent vnto him this relation with manie particular persons for to mooue his most Christian minde, for to sende an Embassador, as in effect hee did, in that sort as hath béene tolde you in the last Chapter of the thirde Booke of this historie, whereas it is declared in particular, and in what estate it doth remaine vnto this day. God for his mercies sake direct all thinges, that it may be to his seruice and glorie, and the saluation of so many soules.

The end of the first booke of the second part.

The second booke of the se∣cond part of the historie of the mightie king∣dome of China, In the which is contayned the voyage that was into that kingdome in the yeare 1576. by the fa∣thers Fryer Peter de Alfaro Costodio in the Ilandes Philippi∣nas of the order of saint Francis of the prouince of S. Ioseph, and other three religious men of the same order, and their miracu∣lous entring into that kingdome, and what happened vnto them for the space of seuen monthes that they there remained, and what they did see and vnder∣stand of: all the which are notable and verie rare.

CHAP. I. The Fryers of Saint Francis came vnto the Ilandes Philip∣pinas, and procured to passe vnto the firme lande of the kingdome of China, with zeale to preach the holy gos∣pell.

THe day of the visitation of our Ladie in the yeare 1578. there came out of Spaine to the Citie of Manilla in the Ilandes Philip∣pinas, the father Fryer Peter de Alfaro, who, went for Costodio of that prouince and fourteene more other religious persons of the same order in his companie, and were sent by the king of Spaine and his royall Counsel of the Indias, for to be ayders and helpers of the Au∣sten Fryers, who vntill that time had béene there alone in those Ilandes, occupied in the conuerting of the people in that countrie, and were the first ministers of the gospell, preaching the same with great zeale, vnto the profite of their soules: of the which people, those Fryers had baptised (when the others ari∣ued) more then one hundred thousande, and the rest prepared and cathecised to receiue the like. Because that at the first occa∣sion that might be giuen, they might enter into the kingdome of China to preach the holy gospell. The which Fryers when

that they had béen there the space of one yeare occupying them∣selues in the same exercise in preaching and conuerting the peo∣ple of that countrie. In the same time they were giuen to vn∣derstande by the relation of the selfe same Austen Fryers, as also by many marchants of China, which came vnto them with marchandice, of things to be wondred at of that mightie king∣dome, and of the infinite number of soules which the diuell had deceiued and brought vnto his seruice with false Idolatrie. The which being by them well vnderstood, they did burne with great zeale and desire of their saluation, and to goe and preach the gospell, although it were to put their persons in whatsoe∣uer hazarde or danger.

So with this their great desire, they did many and diuerse times communicate with the gouernor that was there at that time for his maiestie, who was called the Doctor Francisco de Sandi, desiring his fauour and licence for to goe vnto China in the companie of certaine marchants of that countrie, that were at that present in the port with their ships, offering themselues to get their good will, although it were to offer themselues to be slaues or otherwise whatsoeuer. And séeing that at all such times when as they did intreat of that matter, they found him but luke warme, and that he did (as it were) but to detract the time, and feed them with hope. then they calling to minde, that the chiefest intent and cause of their comming out of Spayne, was to enter into that kingdome, caused a newe desire to grow in them, what with the contractation they had with the sayde Chinos, as well in conuersation as in talke, and finding them to be a people of great abilitie and discretion, and of verie good iudgements, the which did greatly content their desire, they did perswade themselues that it was an easie matter to make them to vnderstande the thinges appertayning vnto God. So that they determined to put other remedies in practise, because that which they required with the good will of the Gouernor, sée∣med to be a large and long matter. So it happened that vpon a time intreating of this matter, and hauing requested of God with great instance for to direct them the readie way which was best for his seruice, and for the profite of those soules, there came to the Ilandes Philippinas a Chino, who accor∣ding as they did vnderstand, was one of the priests & religious

men of that kingdome (of the which priestes there are a great number in euerie towne) this priest went diuerse times vnto the monasterie of the Fryers, and did common with them of the creation of the worlde and other things which did open the way that they might declare vnto him thinges appertayning vnto God, vnto the which he did harken with great good will. And after that hee had declared vnto them in particular the mightinesse and secretes of this mightie kingdome of China (whose conuersion they so greatly desired) he very inquisitiuely asked of them matters touching the Christian faith, of whome within a fewe dayes after he desired to be baptised, for that he would be a Christian, being instructed before in many matters touching our catholike faith.

Our religious men did accomplish his desire, the which was an incredible ioy vnto all the dwellers of the Citie, and a con∣tent vnto himselfe.

So after that he was made a Christian hee remayned in the monasterie amongest the other, but yet would he neuer eate a∣ny other thing but colde herbes:* 1.52 and he séeing that all the reli∣gious men did arise vp at midnight to mattens and discipline themselues, spending the greatest part of the night in prayer before the holy sacrament, hee did not faile one point, but did imitate them in all their dooings, with outwarde showes of a verie good will. All the which did incyte the Fryer Costodio and al the rest of his companions to put in execution their great desire they had, according as it hath beene tolde you. Whereup∣on he went once againe vnto the gouernour to intreat him by faire meanes that which before they had comoned with him of▪ and that he would procure some order or meanes, that those re∣ligious men might go to the kingdome of China to preach the lawe of God, offering himselfe to be one of them, with prote∣station that if he would not giue them leaue, they would pro∣cure to goe without it, with that authoritie the which hee had of God and of his superiors, for to teach and instruct these poore Infidels their neighbors: and this should be done with the first oportunitie they might finde or haue.

But neither this, nor yet the example of that good Chino, which was newe christened was sufficient to perswade the gouernor to consent vnto their request, but peseuering in his

first opinion, he answered and said, that it was too timely, and that the friendship which they had with y^e Chinos, as yet was very small. And how that the fathers of S. Austen had manie times attempted the entrie into that kingdome, and yet neuer could obtaine their desire. And howe that the Chinos that did carrie them did deceiue them, and left them in certaine Ilands, till such time as they heard farther newes of the Rouer Lima∣hon, and of the returne of the Captaine Omoncon, who did carrie them with the good newes of the straight siege in the which they had the rouer: and yet for all that they commanded them to returne from Aucheo, without giuing them anie li∣cence to remaine in the countrie to preach the holy gospell, and nowe to attempt the same, was but to giue occasion vnto the Chinos euerie day to mocke and make a iest of the Spani∣ardes, and willed them to staye till such time, as it were the will of God to giue way vnto the same, which could not be long.

This Fryer Costodio vnderstanding the answere of the Gouernour, perseuering still in his first opinion, and did not goe about to séeke any meanes to accomplish their desire for the entring into the firme lande, hee straightwayes beganne se∣cretly to procure by all meanes possible to attempt and accom∣plish that iourney, although it were without the order and consent of the Gouernour (when that it might not be doone o∣therwise) the which incontinent they beganne to put in vre, for that the Fryer Costodio and Fryer Steuen Ortiz (who was a religious man that for the great desire he had, did learne the China tongue, and at that time did speake it resonablie) they both together did giue to vnderstande of their desire and pretence vnto a deuout souldier of their religion and one that they made great account of, who was called Iohn Dias Par∣do, who often times had made manifest vnto them and saide, thae he had a great desire to doo some especiall seruice vnto God, although it were to hazarde his life in the same, who at that in∣stant did accomplish his desire, and did promise them to beare them companie vnto the death.

So with this conformitie they went straightwayes altoge∣ther to speake with a Captaine of China that was in the same port in a shippe of his owne, who many times did repayre

vnto their couent, to aske of them thinges appertayning vnto God, and the heauens, with showe of a very good vnderstand∣ing, who vnto their iudgement did consent and accept all with great pleasure and delight.

Unto this captayne they did giue to vnderstande the effect of all their desire, requesting him of his ayde and helpe in the pro∣secuting of the same. Who straightwayes did offer himselfe to accomplish their request and to carrie them vnto China, so as they woulde then giue him some thing for to bestowe amongest his marriners. The souldier Iohn Diaz Pardo did promise to giue them all that they would aske, and gaue them in earnest certaine ryalles of plate. And for that all thinges shoulde bée doone in good order, and in such sort that the Gouernour nor any other shoulde haue any suspition or knowledge, it was ordayned amongest them that the Cap∣taine of China should with all spéede dispatch himselfe and de∣part to the port of Bindoro, which is twentie leagues from the citie of Manilla and there to tarrie for them, and to carrie in his companie the Chino that was new baptised as aforesaid.

The captaine made haste▪ dispatched himselfe and departed vnto the port appointed, & within a fewe dayes after the father Costodio and his company with the souldier his friend did fol∣lowe thē. But when they came thether they found the captaine Chino in an other mind, in such sort, that neither gifts nor faire intreatie was sufficient to perswad him, to performe that which he had promised in Manilla, but returned vnto them their ear∣nest before receiued, affirming that for any thing in al y^e world he would not carrie them, for that he knowe very well, if hee should so doo, it would cost him his life and goods.

The newe baptised religious Chino séeing that, wept bit∣terly, with discontentment to sée how the diuell had changed the minde of the Captaine, for that in that kingdome the holie gospell should not be preached. The father Costodio did re∣solue himselue to returne vnto Manilla and there to abide a better oportunitie, as in effect they did, whereas they remay∣ned certayne dayes, till such time it happened as followeth.

Upon a day the Gouernour sent and called vnto him the fa∣ther Costodio, and requested of him, that he would let him haue some Fryer for to sende vnto the riuer of Cagayan, whether

not long before he had sent certaine Spaniards for to inhabite.

The fryer Costodio promised him one, and that he should go with him in companie till he came to the prouince of Illocos whether he went, and that from thence he would dispatch him vnto the riuer of Cagayan, according vnto his worships com∣mandement, requesting of him to haue in his cōpanie to kéepe watch & warde in that iourney the ensigne Francisco de Du∣ennas & Iohn Diaz Pardo the souldier his friend as aforesaide, with pretence to depart frō thence vnto China, as in effect they did, as shall be tolde you. The gouernor being very willing for to pleasure him, did grant his request. So with great spéede he departed, and carried with him the foresaide souldiers, and for companion a religious man called Frier Austin de Tordesil∣las (he who afterwards did put in memorie all thinges y^t passed with them in China) out of the which hath béene taken this small relation. So when they came vnto the Illocos, they found fryer Iohn Baptista and fryer Sebastian of S. Francis, of his owne order, occupied in the teaching and instructing the people of that prouince, which was the fourth day of Iune. The next day following they called a counsell, where it was concluded that all those that were there present would venture themselues for to go vnto China, to conuert those Gentiles or else to die in the quarrell. And the better to bring their purpose to passe, they thought it good to speake vnto an other souldier that was there with thē called Pedro de villa Roel, not telling vnto him their pretence because they would not be discouered (but asked him in this manner) if he would beare him cōpanie & the other two souldiers, who altogether went about a busines of great honour and seruice of God, and the benefite & sauing of many soules, and that he would declare vnto them whether he would go or not, without asking whether nor from wh••t place, for that as then they could not giue him to vnderstand, till time did serue. His answere was, that straightwaies he would beare them companie, and would neuer leaue them to death.

So foorthwith they all together with singular ioy went to the ship wherin the father Costodio and his companion with the other two souldiers came in frō Manilla to y^e place with a rea∣sonable Frigat, although but with fewe marriners, & they not verie expert. So being altogether in the shippe, with all such

thinges as they could get together in that small time for their prouision in that iourney, they made all thinges in a readinesse to set sayle the same day which was the twelfth day of the say•• moneth of Iune. So after they had sayde masse and commen∣ded themselues vnto God, requesting him ••o direct their voyage that it might be to his glorie and seruice, they set sayle vppon a fryday in the morning, with intent to goe foorth of that port, but they could not by no meanes possible, for that the sea went verie loftie vpon the barre, and contending with the sea for to get foorth they were in great danger to haue béene cast away, which was the occasion that with great sorrow they returned into the port, whereas they remayned all day.

CHAP. II. The Fryers and their companions depart from the port of Illocos, after they had committed vnto God the directi∣on of their voyage. They passe great daungers and trou∣bles, & do ouercome them all with the confidence they haue in God, and came vnto the kingdome of China mi∣raculously.

SO the next day after they had committed thēselues to God with great deuotion▪ they embarked themselues and made sayle, and by the will of God they went out of the harbour although with great danger, & they carryed with them an other barke a sterne their ship, in the which they did determine for to set a lande such Indians as they carried with them from the Esquipazon, to helpe them out of the harbour. the which they did not for feare they should be drowned. So when they were out of that riuer, they sayled towards the little Iland, that was but one league from that place, and there they put the Indians a shore, & with thē a young man a Spaniard that they brought from Manilla to serue them. So those which should go on that voyage remained there the same night, who were the frier Co∣stodio, frier Peter de Alfaro borne in Siuel, frier Iohn Bap∣tista, borne in Pe••aro in Italy, fryer Sebastian de san Francis∣co of the citie of Boecia, and frier Augustin de Tordesillas, of the same towne whereof he hath his name, all these foure were priestes of the masse.

The Fryer Costodio would with a very good will haue car∣ried more of them, but he durst not for two causes, the one for that hee would not haue béene discouered, and the other (which was the principal occasiō) because he would not leaue that pro∣uince of the Illocos without such as shold instruct them, wher∣as were many baptised: for which respect, he left some behind him, which afterwarde hee would haue béene very glad that they had béene in his companie. There were thrée Spaniards souldiers that did beare them companie, the one was called the ancient, Francisco de Duennas, of Velez Malaga, the o∣ther Iohn Diaz Pardo of Saint Lucas de Barameda the third Pedro de Villa-roel of the Citie of Mexico. Besides these they had a boy of China, who could speake the spanish tongue, and was one of them that were taken at the siege of Limahon the Rouer, and other foure Indians of Manilla.

They departed from this little Ilande, vpon a munday the first quarter in the morning, which was the fiftéene day of the said moneth of Iune, and sayled that way, so nigh as they could gesse to be the way vnto China, without pilot or any other certaintie, more then that which God did shewe and put into their mindes, with their great desire, which séemed vnto them to comprehende and bring it to passe. This day the winde was contrarie and against them, which was the occasions that they sayled but little. Towardes the euening the winde changed and blewe at the north (the which winde vppon that coast is verie dangerous) which made them greatly afrayde: yet was that feare driuen away by an other feare much greater then that, which was that they should be discouered, and that they should be pursued by the commandement of the gouernour of Manilla: for which occasion whereas they should haue shrow∣ded themselues vnder the land, they wrought contrary, and cast about vnto the sea in great danger to haue béene cast away, but it was the will of God that when as night came the winde did calme (which commonly falleth out to the contrary) but the sea remayned very rough and loftie that they thought verily to haue béene drowned with the furie thereof, for it tossed the Fri∣gatta in such sort that it séemed a whole legion of diuels had taken holde on both sides of the shippe forcing the one against the other, that it rowled in such sort that many times the halfe

decke was in the water, so that the marriners could not stand vpon their féete,* 1.53 but were driuen to sustaine themselues by the ropes & cavels. But the religious men trusting in God, whose zeale had caused them this great trouble, did pray and desire him with many teares that hee would deliuer them out of the same daunger: and not to giue place vnto the diuell for to di∣sturbe them of their voyage and enterprise.

* 1.54Those their orations and prayers did so much preuaile, with certaine coniurations which they made against the diuels (whō they thought they did see visibly) that after midnight the north winde ceased, and began to blowe at the north east, with the which the sea began to waxe calme, so y^t they might make their way to be east northeast, for that they had intelligence, that that course was the shortest cut to the firme land. This winde which was so fauourable vnto thē, did increase so much in two houres, that the sea waxed loftie, and caused them to forget the sorrowe past, and constrained them (for that the shippe was but small) to cut their mast ouer borde, and to put themselues vn∣to the courtesie of the sea, with little hope to escape the danger. But our Lorde, whose zeale did mooue them to attempt that iourney, did direct their voyage in such sort that the next day ••ollowing it came to be calme, in such sort that they might set vp a newe mast in the place of that which was cut ouer borde in the storme, and therewith to nauigate forwardes with their begunne voyage. So vpon the fryday following at the breake of the day they sawe lande, and thinking that it had béene the firme lande. of China, they gaue thankes vnto God, and reioy∣ced, in such sort that they had cleane forgotten the troubles of the stormes and foule weather passed, so they made towards it, and came thither about noone, but when they were a shore, they found that it was but a small Iland and situated foure leagues from the firme lande, and for that it was so nigh, a farre off it séemed to be all one thing. But when they came vnto this I∣lande they did discouer many ships, which were so many in nū∣ber that it séemed all the sea to be couered with thē. The friers, with the great desire they had for to knowe in what port they were, they cōmanded to gouerne their ship towardes whereas they were, who when they saw them & could not know thē, by the strangenes of their ship and sailes they did fly from them all

that euer they could. The which ou•• men perceiuing & could not imagine the cause thereof, they were very much agrée∣ued and sorrowfull, and the more for that they could not learne nor vnderstand where they were. But séeing nigh vnto them to the lewarde thrée ships, they made towardes them, and whē they were somwhat nigh they put themselues as the others did. In this sort they spent all the rest of the day in going from one port to an other, vnto those ships for to infirme thēselues where they were, but all this diligence preuailed them nothing at all till it was almost sunne set, they entred with their frigat into a gut vnder the shore, whereas fell from a high rocke which was more than one hundreth fatham by estimation a streme of water which was as bigge as the bodies of two men together.

In this gut there was thrée other ships and they came to an anker in the middest amongest them, the which beeing done they asked of them what countrie that was, but they answered nothing, nor made any semblance, but looked the one vpon the other, & in beholding of the Spaniards they gaue great laugh∣ters. In this gut they remained all that night almost amased to sée how those people were as though they were inchanted, and they without any light of their desire, which was to knowe wher they were. So y^e next day folowing (which was saterday) verie early in the morning they set sayle and went amongest a great sort of Ilandes alwayes bearing vnto them, which they thought to be the firme lande, being greatly amarueiled to sée the infinite number of shippes both great and small that they sawe: some were a fishing, and some vnder sayle, and other some ryding at an anker. The same day about noone there happened vnto them a strange & miraculous thing, and it was, that passing through a straight that was but a quarter of a league of bredth which was betwixt the firme lande and a small Ilande, in the which was continually foure score ships of warre, sette there for watch and warde, they passed thorough the thickest of them and were neuer seene, for if they hadde, without all doubt they had sonke them, or slaine them, their order and commission is so straight giuen them by their generalles of the sea, in the which they are com∣manded, that whatsoeuer kinde of people of strange nations that they do méete vpon the coast for to kill them or sinke them,

except they do bring licence from some gouernor of such Cities as be vpon the coast, for that such as do meane to haue trafick•• doo sende to demande the same, leauing their ships a great way at sea.

This lawe for to watch and warde was made and ordayned (as they do say) in respect of the Iapones who did enter into cer∣taine of their portes, dissembling themselues to be Chinos, be∣ing apparelled as they were and speaking their language, they did vnto them great and strange hurtes and damages, as is de∣clared in the booke before this. So when they were passed this straight they sayled almost sixe leagues forwardes into a verie fayre and great bay, following other shippes that went before them, for that it seemed that they would enter into some port, and there they might informe themselues where they were, which was the thing that they most desired. When they had sayled about two leagues in this bay they ouertooke one of the thrée shippes and asked of the people that were within her (by the interpreter they had with them) whether they sayled and what lande that was which they sawe before them. Then the principall that was in that ship▪ did put himselfe into his boat, the which hee had at sterne, and came vnto the ship where the Spaniardes were, the better to vnderstande what they did de∣mand, for they before by reason that they were somewhat farre off the one from the other, could not vnderstande the Spani∣ards demand but by signes. So when that he vnderstoode their request he answered them that it was the country of China, & how that he came laden with salt from the citie of Chincheo, and went to make sale thereof vnto the citie of Canton, which was so nigh hand that they might ariue there before night. But when that hee was entred into the spanish ship & saw the friers & the rest that were in their cōpanie & saw that their apparell & spéech was strange vnto him, he asked of them what they were and from whence they came, & whether they went (and when y^e he vnderstood y^t they were Castillos, & of the Ilands Philippinas & came frō the said Ilands, & were bound vnto China, with in∣tent to preach the holy gospell) he asked thē whose licence they had, to conduct them vnto the firme lande. But when he vnder∣stood that they had none, hee asked them howe they passed and escaped the fléete of ships that was in the straight aforesayde.

The Spaniards answered that they found no impediment nor let. So he being greatlie amazed as well of the one as of the other, entred into his owne boate, and with great furie de∣parted from their shippe, and went into his owne, but at his de∣parture the Spaniards did request him, that he would conduct them vnto the cittie, who gaue them to vnderstande by signes that he woulde, although he feared the rigorous punishment that in that kingdome is executed vppon all such as doo bring into the same any man of a strange nation (as hath béene tolde you in the first part of this historie.) So hee fearing that if hée shoulde enter with him into the port, the fault would be impu∣ted vnto him, therefore at such time as hee came within halfe a league of the riuers mouth, he cast about his shippe and sai∣led to sea, and went so farre that in a short time the Spaniards had lost the sight of them, who when they saw that they had no guide, they followed the course of another shippe that they had discouered before the other did cast about to sea, for which occa∣sion the other two ships that wee spake off before were depar∣ted. So a little before the sunne-set they discouered the mouth and entrie of a great and mightie brode riuer, out of the which came two great streames or armes, and in them many ships entering in and going forth, and considering how they had the winde which serued them well, they entered into the same, but when they had sailed forwards a quarter of a league, they disco∣uered so great a multitude of barkes, that it seemed vnto them a groue, or some inhabited place, and as wee drewe nigh vnto them, they not knowing our shippe, all began to flie and run away with so great noise, as though they should haue béene all set on fire or smoke in that place. The Spaniards séeing that they were the occasion of this feare amongst them, they with∣drew themselues into the middest of the riuer▪ whereas they strooke saile and came to an anker, & there they did ride all that night, and it was in such a place that none of al the other barks and boates came nigh them by a great way.

The next day following which was sunday, the one & twen∣tith day of Iune they weighed anker, and went vnder their foresaile vp that arme of the riuer, the which within a little while they had sailed, did ioine with the other arme aforesaide and was in that place of so great widenesse that it séemed to bée

a sea, there sailed in and out many shippes, barkes and boates of whome the Spaniards demaunded how farre the port was off from that place, but they answered nothing at all, but with great laughter and wonder to sée the Spaniards and their kind of attyre, they departed. But when they had sailed two leagues vp the riuer, they discouered a high towre and very faire vnder the which were at an anker a great number of shippes, thither they sailed right on. So when as they came right ouer against the towre, they saw on shore a great mighty crane to discharge merchandize withall, whereat lay many ships: but when they came to the point, fearing that some ordinance would be shot at them, they strooke all their sailes according vnto the vse & cu∣stome in y^e ports of Spaine. They after a while that they had remained in that sort, & saw that neither the towre nor y^e ships did make any motion towards them, they turned and hoised vp againe their sailes and went wheras al the ships were, & when they came amongst them, they let fall their anker wheras they did ride looking when they would come to demand of them any thing.

CHAP. III. The Friers and their companions came vnto the Cittie of Canton, they went on shore, and praised God for that it had pleased him to let thē see their desire fulfilled. There comes a Iustice to visite them, and hath with them great communication.

THe Spaniards séeing that they were there at an anker a good while, & that there was none that came vnto them to demand any questiō, they hoised out their boate, & went in it on shore, wheras they al knéeled downe vpon their knées, and with great deuotion did say Te Deum laudamus, giuing thankes to God for that he had so myraculously brought them into y^e king∣dome of China, of them so much desired, without any Pilot or other humane industrie: the which being doone, they began to walke along by the crane aforesaid, nigh vnto the which were certaine houses whereas were kept ropes and tackling belong∣ing vnto the shippes: so they procéeded forwards with intent to séeke the gates of the Citie, the which after they had gone the space of foure hargabus shot, they found the gate which was ve∣rie

great and sumptuous of a strong and gallant edifice. The people of the country séeing them at their comming a shore how they did knéele downe, and how that their manner of at∣tire was different from the people of the same, & not knowing from whence they did come, did cause in them great admirati∣on, and to ioyne togither a great troope of people, and followed them with great desire to sée the end of their enterprise.

This great multitude of people was the occasion that they entred in at the gates of the Cittie, without being discouered of the guards & ports that were put there for that purpose, nei∣ther were they disturbed of the entry, by reason of the great throng of people, and strangenesse of the matter. So after they had gone a while in the stréete (the people increasing more and more to sée them) they staied in the porch of a great house, there where as the iustices of the sea, or water bailies do kéepe their courts of audience: and in the meane time that they remained there, which was a pretty while, the guardes of the gate vnder∣stood that amongst y^e presse & throng of the people, did enter cer∣taine strangers contrary to the precept giuen them vpon great penalties: they straightway with great feare that their ouer∣sight should be discouered, ran & laid hands vpon y^e Spaniards & carried them backe againe, & put them out of the gate of the ci∣tie, without doing any euil or harme vnto their persons, & wil∣led them to stay there in that place till such time as they had gi∣uen y^e gouernor of the Cittie to vnderstand thereof, & he to send thē licence that they may enter in againe. So after a good while that they had remained there wheras the guards had set them, there came vnto thē a man, who was a Chino called Canguin, and could speake Portugal: who knowing them to be Christi∣ans by their faces & attire, did aske them in the Portingal toong what they sought? y^e Spaniards answered him, that their com∣ming into that kingdom was for to shew & declare to them the way to heauen, & to giue thē to vnderstand & know y^e true God, the creator of heauen & earth: and that they would very faine talke with the gouernor to intreat therof. This Chino by & by brought to thē a man that could speak very good Portuges, who as after they did vnderstād both he his wife & childrē were chri∣stened, and although they were borne in China, yet did they dwel 3. years with Portugals that were inhabited in Machao

which is twenty leagues from that cittie of Canton. This did demande the same question of them that the other did, & where∣fore they came into that countrie? they answered him the same as they did the other: hee replied and asked them who was the Pilot that brought them thither? they answered, the will of God, they not knowing howe, nor from whence. But af∣ter they had sailed at the sea certaine dayes, they came vnto that place, that according as it was giuen them to vnderstande, is the cittie of Canton, of the which they haue heard declared ma∣ny straunge thinges: the Chino asked howe the guardes of the sea and shippes that were in the straight aforesaid did let them passe: they answered that they saw no guards, nor any other that did trouble them their passage. This last answere did cause the Christian Chino greatly to admire, who being moo∣ued with a good zeale, said vnto them, that they should returne againe vnto the shippe, and not to come forth vntill such time as he had giuen aduice of their comming vnto the Mandelines of the sea, which be certaine iudges appointed to giue aduice of all such matters to the gouernor, that he may command what is to be done therein.

So the Spaniards returned vnto the shippe whereas they remained a good while, and passed great heate, for that it dooth excéede in that port. So after a while they sawe come vnto a house which was néere vnto the gate of the Cittie, a man of great authoritie, who was brought in a litter Chaire, & much people came with him: he stayed at that house, and from thence sent to call vnto him the religious men, and all the rest that came in their company: before them all came one that carried a table all whited, and thereon was written certaine great let∣ters with blacke ynke, the which (as after they vnderstood) was the licence that the gouernor of the cittie gaue them for to come a shoore, without the which there is no stranger permitted. The fathers did straightwayes obey it, and came forth of their shippe with more companie then they desired (of such as came to sée them) who were so many in number, that although the sergeants and officers of the iudge that sent for them, did beate them for to make way, yet was it a good while before they coulde come vnto the house whereas the iudge was, although the way was but short. So when they approched nigh one of

••he sergeants bad them knéele down before the iudge, the which they did with great humilitie without any replication. Hee was set in a verie rich Chaire with so great maiestie that they were greatly astonyed to sée it, and the more when that they vnderstood by the christian Chino that he was not the go∣uernor, neither of the supreme iudges: hee was apparelled in a robe of silke, close from aboue down to the foote, with the sleeues very wide, and a girdle imbossed, and on his head a bonnet full brooches, such as bishops doo vse on their mytres. Before him was set a table, whereon was paper and inke: and on the one side and the other two rankes of men, as though they were to guard him, yet without weapons. They had al of them in their hands long canes of foure fingers brode, with the which (as af∣ter they did vnderstand) they do beat su••h as are offēders, vpon the calues of their legges with great crueltie, as hath beene told you in the first bookes of this historie. All these had vppon their heads a manner of helmet made of blacke leather, and on them great plumes of Pecocks feathers, with brooches made of met∣tal, a thing vsed to be worne in that countrie of such as are exe∣cutioners or ministers of iustice.

The iudge bad the interpreter to aske them of what nation they were, and what they sought in that countrie, and who was their guide to bring them into that port: the which being vn∣derstoode by the religious men, answered that they were Spa∣niards, and subiect vnto the king Philip of Spaine, and came thither to preach the holy gospel,* 1.55 and to teach them to know the true God, creator of the heauen and earth, and to leaue off the worshiping of their Idols (who haue no more power of them∣selues, then that which is giuen them by him that doth make them): the which worship is knowne and receiued by his holie law, and declared by the mouth of his only begotten sonne, and confirmed with diuine tokens from heauen, in whose guarde doth consist the saluation of all soules. And to the last, touching who was their guide vnto that kingdome: they answered, that it was God, vnto whose will all creature are subiect, as vnto the true creator: all the which (as afterward it did appeare) the interpreter did not truely interpret of the interpretation of the Spaniards: vnderstanding that if hee should truely interpret what they saide, the Iudge would forthwith sende them away,

which would be the occasion that he shuld get nothing of them. So that he made his interpretatiō as it best séemed for his pur∣pose, fearing (as after he did confesse) that if he shu••d decla••e the truth of that which the Spaniards had said, it would haue been verie odious to the Iudge, & afterward both vnto them and to himselfe might be the occasion of some great euill: but to con∣clude, he answered and told the Iudge that they were certaine religious men who liued in common, a sharpe and asper life, much after the manner of those of that kingdome: and that go∣ing from the Iland of Luzon vnto the Ilands of the Illocos, in a great storme and tempest that chanced them, the ship wherin they were was cast away, and al their people cast away, sauing they, who escaped by vsing great diligence▪ and put themselues in that small ship which came in company with another grea∣ter shippe, without Pilot or mariner, for that they were almost all drowned, and setting saile in the best manner they could or knewe, being holpen and constrained by necessitie, they let their ship saile, and go whither as fortune did cary them. So af∣ter many dangers and stormes at the sea, according to the will of the heauens they came vnto this port, whose name as yet they knew not. The Iudge asked them where they had that Chino that they brought in their company for an interpreter. They answered that he was in Luzon & captiue vnto a Spa∣niard: they tooke him and set him frée, and hée vnderstanding that they were bound vnto the firme land of China which was his naturall countrie, he requested them to carrie him thither, the which they did with a very good will, for that they had neede of him to vtter their desire, if néede did so require. All the which the other interpreter fearing, that if he should tel vnto y^e Iudge how that he was captiue vnto the Christians, hée woulde bée offended, and therefore hee did falsifie the same and saide, that comming vnto an Iland to take in fresh water, they found the boy there, where he was captiue eight yeares before, and came thither forced with a great storme, in the which was drowned a merchants shippe that was bound to Luzon, and he alone esca∣ped by swimming, and so hee came aborde the shippe, in the which were the fathers, not knowing whither they went. All these vntruthes he did inuent for to dissemble and go forwards with his knauish pretence, and would not declare the true in∣tent

of the Friers: the which he had decréed with himselfe how to doo before the Iudge did sende to call them. Moreouer the Iudge did aske them what they brought in their small shippe, they answered that they brought nothing but one chest and two little fardels of bookes, and an ornament for to say masse. This did the interpreter declare truely vnto the Iudge, for that ex∣perience might be made thereof. So the Iudge forthwith com∣manded that it should be brought before him, the which being done, he caused it to be vndone, and he perused euery thing by it selfe, the which being strange vnto him, for that he neuer saw the like: he made signes vnto them that he receiued great con∣tentment in the séeing of thē, but specially of the Images they brought: but that which did best please him, was an Ara or so∣pre-altar of a blacke stone, the which did shine so bright that they might sée themselues therein, as well as in a glasse. These Friers did bring the same with them out of the kingdome of Mexico, whereas you haue great aboundance, but specially in the prouince of Mechuacan. So after that hee had seene all, and sawe that it was drie, without any signe or token that it had béene in the sea, hée called to remembrance the wordes of the interpreter in the name of the fathers, touching the storme wherein their shippe was cast away, and howe that they esca∣ped by swimming, and put themselues in that small shippe in the which they came: and considering of the same, it séemed vnto him that they did fable in that which they had saide: so that he did replie and asked if it were true that which they had before declared, and howe it shoulde bee that their bookes and other things were not wet at the sea, which was an euident to∣ken and plainely to be vnderstood that they had fabled and told lies, and so he beléeued they did in all the rest. The interpreter fearing least by that argumēt his falshod would be discouered, he fel in talke a while w^t the Friers, asking & answering things very different to that which y^e Iudge had cōmanded him. Thē he w^t a strange & sharpe boldnes answered to y^e difficulty propo∣ned by y^e Iudge, & said, That as all merchants at such time as their shippes are readie to sinke and to be lost, they doo procure first to saue such thinges as are of most estimation, forget∣ting all the rest: euen so these religious men did procure with great care and diligence to saue those books and that ornament,

which is all their treasure, and yet for all their diligences done they lost a great number mo. All these fables and lies, after many dayes the religious fathers came to haue the know∣ledge of.

The Iudge did aske them if they brought any armor or wea∣pons in their shippe, they answered that they were no men to bring them, neither according vnto their profession they coulde not weare nor vse them, for that they were religious, and pro∣fessed other matters contrary vnto the vse of armor or wea∣pon, promising and auowing vnto God perpetuall pouertie and chastitie, and vnto their superior prelates obedience all the dayes of their liues. The Iudge returned and asked them if they had any monie, and where withall they did eate and appa∣rell themselues, and bought those bookes and ornaments: they answered, that all that which they had was giuen them by se∣cular Christians for Gods sake, whome they did serue, for that they should pray for them and for the saluation of their soules.

The Iudge when he heard this, was greatly astonied for that the interpreter did declare the truth, and made signes that he re∣ceiued griefe and had pittie on them, although he gaue not full credite to that which he heard, but said that he would go aborde their shippe to sée if they did say the truth, in not bringing anie armor or weapon, neither siluer nor merchandize. This did hée straightwayes put in vre, and commaunded them that brought him in the litter Chaire, vppon their shoulders to go thitherward: all those people did beare him companie, as also a great number that were there ioyned togither to heare the ex∣amination of those strangers, and also the Spaniards he com∣manded to go next vnto him.

So when that he was in their shippe set in his Chaire, his ministers beganne to search the shippe in all places, both aboue and below, and could finde nothing but a little Rice, which was left of tha•• which they brought with them: they gaue y^e Iudge to vnderstande thereof, who looking vpon the Spaniards, said, that all they that were in the shippe might heare him: these do speake the truth, and they doo seeme vnto me to bee good people, and without any superstition: and without all doubt they doo come and will be after the manner of our religious men, accor∣ding as is to be séene in the vniformitie of their aprarell, as also

in their heads and beardes. Then he beganne to demaunde of them certaine thinges, more of curiositie then of suspection: who answered him, casting vp their eies vnto heauen (for that their talke was thereof) & they saw that the Iudge did greatly reioyce and had pleasure therein, for that it séemed that they had the heauens for their God, as they haue, by reason they did so much looke vpwards. After this the Iudge came foorth of the shippe, but the religious men remained behind at his comman∣dement with his companions: and likewise hee commaunded certaine of those officers that came with him to remaine about their ship at the waters side, for their guard, more for that none should doo to them any harme, then for any euill suspition they had of them.

Al that day that the Spaniards were in their ship, the coun∣trie men came downe to the water side to sée them, and that in so great number, that they did woonder to sée them, and on the other side they greatly reioyced to sée so many soules there ioy∣ned togither, hoping that when it should bee the will and plea∣sure of GOD, to giue them oportunitie, to baptise them all.

The next day following in the morning, they sawe another Mandelin or Iudge comming towards their shippe, accompa∣nied with much people, and with little lesse maiestie then the other had, who entred into their shippe, and commaunded to search both aboue and belowe to sée whether they brought any armour, weapon, or any other kinde of merchandize, and sée∣ing that they coulde finde nothing else but their bookes and their ornament aforesaide, hée commaunded it to bée brought before him, who did peruse the same, péece by péece with great admiration, and shewed great contentment that hee receiued to sée their bookes and Images: although that which did most content him was to sée the Ara of blacke stone, as was said be∣fore. Then hee commanded one of the Fathers for to reade in one of the saide bookes, and for to write, the which was done before him with so great facilitie, that the Iudge receiued great contentment to sée it. Then hée asked them if that with the said letters they could write any other language that were dif∣ferent vnto theirs. The Fathers answered yea, that they coulde write any language: and for a plainer proofe, they wrote

on a péece of paper certaine reasons in the Iudges language, the which did cause him greatly to maruell, and said (turning his face to some of them that came with him) these men are not barbarous nor of any euill condition so farre as I can see.

With this he departed out of their shippe, and went to giue the gouernour (who sent him) to vnderstand of that he had séene and coulde vnderstande of the Spaniards in this his visitation, who straightwayes did sende them a licence vpon a table, that they shoulde come on shore, and bee suffered to enter into the cittie freely at their will.

CHAP. IIII. The Spaniards go forth of their ship, and go into the Citie, vnto the christened Chinos house, and are carried before another superior Iudge in common audience, and manie other passe with them.

SO soone as they had their licence, they went forth of their ship and entred in at the gate of the Cittie, although with great trouble, by reason of the great number of people that came to sée them, as a thing neuer séene before: then they went to the christened Chinos house, hee that serued for their interpreter, who made very much of them, and giuing them to vnderstande that hée had made a true report of all that they had commanded him, and did offer himselfe, to do so much with the Iustices that he would procure to get licence of the gouernor for them to re∣maine in the countrie, and to giue them a house wherein to re∣maine and dwel: and did admonish them that at that time they should not deale for to make the Chinos Christians, vntil such time as they were better knowne, and coulde speake the lan∣guage, and then should they doo it with a great deale more ease. All these promises, with the falsifying of that the Spaniards spake before to the Iudges, was to content the Friers (as in discourse of time they did vnderstande) and onely to get monie from them, for that it séemed vnto him, that it could not be but that they shoulde haue good stoore, for that they came from a rich countrie, whereas it was: and againe to come about bu∣sinesse

of so great importance, about the which they shoulde remaine there a long time (as aforesaide) as they afterwarde did more at large vnderstande. If that interpreter had decla∣red in fidelitie all that which they had spoken, without al doubt they woulde not haue suffered them to haue come on shoare, else haue put them in some prison, for that they came on lande without licence, and to haue shewed them the most fauour, they woulde haue caused them to returne from whence they came, whereas the guardes of the straight (of whome we haue spoken off before) woulde either in secrete or publike sinke them at the sea, for that they were all greatly in hatred against them: the reason was that the Aytao, who is (as is declared in the first booke of this historie) the president of the counsell of warre▪ and had vnderstanding howe that they passed tho∣rough the fléete and were not séene, which was a thing that they all wondred at.

This Aytao did forthwith make secret information of the same, and founde it to bée true, whereuppon hee did Iudge the Captaines to perpetuall prison, where they were well whip∣ped, and did secrest all their goods: for the which all their kin••∣folkes and the rest of the guards had great indignation against the Spaniards, and woulde with great ease haue béene reuen∣ged on them, but that they did feare the punishment that should bee doone on them, after that it shoulde bee knowne. In the which they doo execute their iustice in this kingdome more then in any place in all the world.

In the house of this Christened Chino they dined that day as they did many more afterwarde, but euery night they re∣turned to their fregat to bed: for that they durst not leaue their things alone, neither to lie out of their shippe, for that one of the Iudges had so commanded.

CHAP. V. The Spaniards are called before a Iudge, who doth examine them, and offer them great fauour: he dooth write vnto the vizroy, giuing credit vnto the persons, who sendeth commission vnto a Iudge called Aytao, for to examine

their cause: the chiefe captaine of Machao dooth accuse them, in saying that they were spies, and doth intreate of other strange matters.

VPon Saint Iohn baptist day they were called before a Iudge, who (as after this did vnderstand) was a superiour vnto the other past: but when they came whereas hee was in place of audience, his ministers did straight wayes commande them to knéele downe at such time as they came in sight of the Iudge, which was vnto the religious men no small torment. Hee demanded of them the same that the others did, and they answered in briefe, that they came to preach the holy Gospell, and requested him to giue them licence to execute the same, and to remaine in that Cittie of Canton for to learne the China tongue, whereby they might giue them to vnderstande and knowe the trueth of the heauen. The interpreter did falsifie their wordes, as hee had doone vnto the other Iudges, and said no more, but for so much that fortune and fowle weather had driuen them into that port, they woulde liue amongst them, although it were to serue them as slaues, for that if they would returne vnto the Ilande of Luzon, or by another name called Manilla, they could not, for that they knewe not the way, nei∣ther had they anie Pilot to conduct them.

The Iudge had pittie on them, and commanded that such thinges as they had in their shippe should bée brought on land, for that hee woulde sée them: amongst the which, the thing which caused him most to maruell at, was when hée sawe the Images, and Ara (or Alter stone) of blacke Iasper stone (of the which we haue made large mention:) hee requested of the Spaniards that they woulde giue them two Images, which when they had giuen them, they made shew to estéeme greatly of the present, for that they were thinges that they haue not a∣mongst them. He talked with them very friendly, & caused them to arise from the ground whereas they did knéele, and to shewe them the more fauour, he caused to be giuen them to drinke in his presence a certaine beurage which they do vse, made of cer∣taine hearbs, and vse it for a comfortable thing for the heart, & is commonly vsed amongst thē, although they are not dry: and amongst the Chinos is a shew of particular fauour.

This Iudge did more vnderstande the intent of the Spani∣ards then any of the other past, for their interpreter had tolde vnto him that they woulde remaine in the countrie for to cure sicke persons and to bury the dead, the which they could do ex∣cellent well. When the Iudge heard these wordes, hee gaue with his hande a great stroke vppon the table that was before him, and said with showes of great wonder vnto other inferior Iudges that were with him: Oh what good people are these as it séemeth: it would be vnto mee a great ioy, if that I coulde of mine owne authoritie accomplish that which they do desire, but our lawes do forbid the same, and that with great rigour. All this did their interpreter tel them afterward. At this time there entred into the place of audience whereas they were, a man of China, one of the common sort, al imbrewed with blood, crying out and making a great noise, without any consort, who pro∣strating himselfe vpon the ground did complaine of other Chi∣nos with whom he had fallen out, and was beaten and buffeted in cruell sort.

The Iudge when he saw him, did straight wayes command his officers to bring the offenders before him,* 1.56 the which was done with a trice, & they returned with the plaintife, bringing thrée other Chinos bound togither by the armes, and as it sée∣med they were men of base sort. The Iudge incontinent made information wholly of all that passed, and condemned them without writing any letter, in twenty sotes or strokes a peece: the officers forthwith tooke thē with so great cruelty as though they had bin diuels, & threwe them vpon the ground with their bellies downwards to execute the sentence giuen by the Iudge, and when they had pulled off their hose, they began to whippe them vpon the calues of their legges with a sot made of canes, in manner as hath béene told you before. The religious people who were present all this while: and taking pitie on these con∣demned men, fell downe at the féete of the Iudge, and by signes and tokens did craue of him for the loue of God, that his sen∣tence might not be executed: who straightwayes commanded the executioners to cease, condiscending vnto the petition of the Friers, and did pardon the offenders fiftéene sottes or strokes of the twentie, wherein they were condemned.

The Iudge did very much woonder at the pouertie of these

religious men, and at the sharpe and asper apparell that they weare: but the chiefest thing that he did maruell at, was when that he vnderstoode howe they had passed the fleete of ships that were put in the straight for to defende and keepe the coast, and were neuer seene, which séemed vnto him a thing impossible, except it were by permission of the heauen.

So when this examination and talke was finished, he com∣mande•• ••hem to returne vnto th••ir shippe, promising them for to write vnto the vizroy (who was thirtie leagues from that place) and to giue him to vnderstand that they were men with∣out any suspection, and that he might wel giue them licence for to come to his presence: vpon which relation hée woulde com∣maunde what shoulde bee doone, either to tarrie or to go vnto him.

Within few dayes after they vnderstood that the Iudge had accomplished his promise, for that the vizroy had committed the matter vnto another Iudge called Aytao, whose office is for to examine and inquire the causes of strangers: the wordes of the commission were as followeth.

I am written vnto from Canton howe that there are come thither certaine men apparelled very sharpe and asper,* 1.57 after the fashion of our religious men in the wildernesse, who bringe no weapons, neither any other thing that might séeme to pre∣tend any euill intent: and for that they are thy charge, exa∣mine them with care and diligence, and prouide to doo there∣in that which shall be most requisite and conuenient: giuing vs to vnderstand the large and true relation of that which shall happen.

The verie same day of Saint Iohn, the Spaniards being verie merry and vnmindfull of any thing, for that they had all that day receiued the Sacrament: there came vnto them abord their shippe or frigat the interpreters, and did euidently de∣clare their euill purpose and intent (saying) that it was appa∣rent what they had done for them, and in what perill they did euery day put themselues in for their matters, and that it was reason that they shoulde pay them for the same, and if not, they would not helpe thē any more, neither interpret or take paines in their businesse: certifying them that if they did faile to satis∣fie them, that they should not finde any that would doo it with

so great good will and diligence (as they should finde by experi∣ence) and how that they had béene put in prison if they had not béene, for entring into that kingdome without licence: and for that they enterpreted for them with great curtesie and fauour they had also béene commaunded to returne backe againe from whence they came, which by their meanes, was the cause that the Iudges did intreate them so friendly as they did. The Fa∣ther Costodio when he vnderstoode their intent, and did eui∣dently see that it was wholly grounded vppon gaine: conside∣ring also the vrgent necessitie that they had of them, and not sa∣tisfying them, it was difficult to finde any for to helpe them in that their necessitie: of two euils he chose the best, and deliue∣red vnto them a pawne for their contentment, one of the two Challices they brought with them,* 1.58 giuing them great charge to vse and kéepe it as a sacred thing, and dedicated for to conse∣crate the blood of Christ. The principall interpreter did take it with great content, and presently gaue it a newe master in selling it vnto a gold-smith for as much as it was woorth, who did melt it, and made things thereof according to his trade: yet they not being content therewith, and that it séemed vnto them that those fathers could not but bring with them much riches, they inquired of the China boy whom they brought to bee their interpreter, with faire words to know if they had any g••lde or siluer, or pretious stones, or any other thing of valure: but when they vnderstoode that they brought none of those things but onely their bookes and some other ornaments to say masse, they straightwayes imagined in their mindes and that with great care and diligence, to procure some way to get from them the other Challice which they had seene: and the better to put it in execution, they repeated againe vnto the Friers that which before hath beene tolde you, augmenting thereunto many wordes and reasons, affirming that they had spent vp∣on them in giuing them to eate twelue Taes more then y^e Chal∣lice which they had giuen them did weigh or amount to, which was twelue ducats of Spaine: hauing before giuen them to vnderstād at such time as they did eate, that they did it of almes and for Gods sake, and with so great content, that many times it happened when they sawe that the Spaniards woulde not eate any dainty thing, but would féede and content themselues

with base victuals) he would say vnto them, that they shoulde eate without any griefe or care, that when it should so fall out that his substance did saile him, hee woulde then pawne one of his sonnes to buy victuals.

The father Costodio plainly séeing and vnderstanding that their intent & purpose was wholly groūded for to get from him y^e other challice, he answered that he had not for to giue them, & how that he had giuen the other challice in pawn of that which they had spent in victuals, and for their trauell that they had ta∣ken for them. The interpreter did replie, saying, that if they had nothing, that they shoulde séeke it, séeing that they ought it for their victuals which they had eaten, and that it was the vse of that countrie, that when any man did owe any thing, & hath not for to pay the same, for to sell their children, or else to be∣come slaues vnto their creditor they demanded the other Chal∣lice that remained, for that the other which they had giuen thē did weigh but sixtéene Taes, which was but a small matter in respect of their desert, onely for their trauel in their enterpreta∣tions. This Frier Costodio did pacifie them in the best maner hee coulde, promising to pay both the one and the other, hauing oportunitie for the same, and that they woulde procure it with as great care as was possible: and requesting him for to keepe the Challice (that he had giuen him in pawne) in great venera∣tion, for that hee did estéeme it, much more for the consecrati∣on and dedication vnto the deuine Colto, then for the value of that it wayed: and more promised him vpon his word to write vnto the Portugals that were in Machao, signifying vnto thē their necessitie, and to demande their almes & charity, and looke whatsoeuer they did send them, being little or much, should bee giuen him. Then the interpreter who had his eyes fixed vppon gaine, saide, that they shoulde forthwith write, and that hee woulde giue him a messenger for to carrie the letter, and to bring answere of the same, as hee had doone the like not ma∣ny dayes before. The Father Costodio did write vnto the Bi∣shoppe that was in Machao, giuing him to vnderstande of his comming, and of his companions vnto the Cittie of Can∣ton, and howe that his comming thither was onelie to pro∣cure for to preach the holy Gospel, and for to conuert and turne to God those blind Idolaters. The which letter being receiued

by the bishop, he made answere, praysing their intent and pur∣pose, animating them with godly wordes of exhortation, and therewith did sende and demand the copie of such authortie as they brought from the holy father touching that the which they pretended. This hee did for that all the sayde countrie vnto the lande of Iapon was committed vnto him by the holy father.

Unto this letter the father Costodio answered, that hauing oportunitie he would obey his commandement, and shew vnto him the facultie he brought, and also would him selfe in person go thether for to kisse his handes, and to satisfie all the inhabi∣tants of that towne (for that it was giuen him to vnderstande that they reported euill of them, and sayde that they were va∣cabondes and lost men, and not true religious men, neither sa∣cerdotes nor priestes, and how that they had requested certaine Chinos, which at that time came vnto Machao, that at their returne againe vnto Canton, they should tell the Iudges and aduertise them with good aduisement, how that there were cer∣••••ine Castillos come into their Citie, whom they did certaine∣ly know not to be of their nation but of an other, and subiectes vnto a different & strange king, whom they did beléeue to come thether for some ill intent and purpose in counterfeit attire, and came for spyes from the Castillos of Luzon, and that they did beléeue that after them did come some armie to do hurt in some part of that countrie, and that they should preuent it in time, for that if so be that any thing should happen, the fault should not be imputed vnto them.

All this the Portingales did (as afterwarde they did plaine∣ly vnderstande) for feare that the Castillos shoulde take from them their contractation and gaine which they had in that city: by which occasion their intent did so procéede forward, that they did certifie the Chinos, that the chiefe Captaine of Machao (who was put there by the king of Portingall) had presented a petition vnto a Citie that was ioyning to Canton, aduerti∣sing the Iudges of that before spoken of, and protesting that i•• any harme or damage should come to that country in admitting the Castillos, that it should not be imputed vnto them.

But the Iudge vnderstanding their euill intent, and that their accusations were more vppon malice and enuie, then of any trueth, he answered vnto the same, that he was particu∣larly

informed of those religious persons, against whom they did complaine, howe that they were men of whom they néeded not to feare, and without any suspition, as it did plainely ap∣peare when they did visite their ship wherein they came, where they found nothing, but onely a fewe bookes, and some other thinges, which did more signifie deuotion than to make any warre. This Iudge (notwithstanding the answere he made) for that afterwards the chiefe captaine should not raise vp some inuention, tooke the originall petition, and sent it with great se∣curitie vnto y^e viceroy of the prouince of Aucheo, that he might sée & peruse it: who when that he had easily perceiued it, and vn∣derstood the intent of him that presented the same, and the inno∣cencie of them that were therein complained of, he sent & com∣manded the gouernor of Canton for to giue them good inter∣tainment, and not to permit any harme or hurt to be done vnto thē, & that he should send them vnto the city of Aucheo, for that he would sée them, for that it was tolde him that they seemed to be holy men, and although that they had their apparell in tho same forme, of the Austin friers (whom he had séene) yet their garments were of an other colour and more asper.

The chiefe captaine séeing that his intent fell not out well with the Iudges of China, he commanded to bee proclaymed publicke in Machao that none should write vnto them, nor cō∣municate with them vpon paine of banishment and to pay two thousande ducats. All this was not sufficient for to coole the mindes of some deuout persons of the religion of the glorious saint Francis, but were rather incyted to offer their fauour & helpe, séeing they had néede thereof, but in particular the bishop did helpe them alwaies with his almes, and also an honorable priest called Andres Cotino, who making small account of the proclamation did write vnto them diuerse times, although secretly, and sent their letters with almes, and many exhorta∣tions to procéed forward with their holy zeale & intent. Besides this they sent vnto thē a spaniard called Pedro Quintero who had dw••lt there many yeares amongest the Portingals, and hauing oportunitie they sent him many times with comforta∣ble things and letters, but not signed, for if happily they should be met with all, they might denie them to be theirs.

Now returning to our purpose, the interpreter with desire to

be payd of that which hee saide he had spent and laide out, did bring the messenger that he promised them to go vnto Machao to carrie their letters vnto such religious men as they knewe: in the which he craued their almes and helpe for to pay their in∣terpreter, and praying them for the loue of God to sende them likewise so much as should redéeme their challice (who at this time knew not how it was solde and broken).

This messenger went with all diligence and secrecie, and re∣turned with the like, & brought with him that which they sent for, & other iunkets of great cōtent, the which came in very good season, for that one of the sayde friers called frier Sebastian of S. Francis was very sick of a strong ague, wherof in few daies after he died, very wel & with a strange desire to suffer martyr∣dome for Gods sake. When this messenger came, there was come thither the Aytao who is Iudge of the strangers and was without the citie, vnto whom was cōmited the examination of the Spaniards, who after that he had concluded other matters cōmanded them to be brought afore him with great loue & gen∣••lenesse, for so the viceroy of Aucheo had commanded him.

CHAP. VI. The Spaniards seing themselues in great necessitie, hauing not to maintaine themselues, they go into the streetes to aske almes, the gouernor vnderstanding thereof cōman∣deth to giue them a stipend out of the kings treasure, the interpreter goeth forwardes with his couetousnes & de∣ceit: they be carried before the Iudges of the citie, with whō they do intreat of diuers matters: they do aduise the the viceroy of al, who cōmandeth to send thē to Aucheo.

BEcause they would not sée themselues in the like danger with the interpreter, as y^t which was past, they would not go any more to eate at his house, but rather to giue an example vnto those of the citie, they went foorth euery day by two and two to aske almes: and although they were infidels, yet they gaue them with great contentment and ioie, because it was a rare thing in that kingdome to sée them begge in the stréetes, by reason (as hath béene tolde you) that they haue no poore folk, neither are they permitted if there be any to aske in y^e

streetes nor in their temples. When that the Gouernor vnder∣stoode thereof, and how that they did it for pure necessitie, and had no other waies to maintaine themselues, hee commanded to be giuen them euerie day a certaine stipend vpon the kinges cost, the which was with so great abundance, that mainteining the souldiers that came with them and all the rest, yet had they to spare, for that their stipende was giuen thē in money, which was sixe Mayesses of siluer, whereof they had to spare, for that all thinges in that countrie is so good cheape, (as hath béen told you in many places.)

Their interpreter séeing the good newes that was brought from Machao for the Spaniardes, by a bill that a certayne deuout man had sent him in secret, whereupon would be giuen vnto him all that was néedefull, with protestation to pay all that should be giuen vnto them although it should amount vn∣to a great summe (with the which hee wrote a letter vnto the Fryer Costodio of great comfort, in strengthening him and all the rest to perseuer in their intent which God had put in their mindes for the saluation of those soules) the Interpreter (I say) beganne to imagine, that for to profite himselfe it was conuenient for to delate and detract the departure of the Spa∣niardes, and did exact vpon them euery day in the buying of their victuals, the halfe of the money that was giuen them.

So vpon a day he came verie much out of order and fayned that the Aytao had commanded that they should foorthwith de∣part out of the kingdome: but yet notwithstanding he would present a petition in their name, saying, that for as much as time did not serue them to nauigate, neither was their shippe in plight for to make their iourney, that it would please them to get them a house whereas they might remaine thrée or foure monethes, in the which time they might prouide them of all thinges necessarie for their voyage, and possible it may so fall out that in this time, they séeing their manner of liuing to bée good, and to shew good examples they may let them to remaine in the countrie liberally and to learne the language, and then beginne to preach and declare the right way vnto heauen. All this he spake with great dissimulation, for to profite himselfe, for he knewe verie well that the Aytao had willed him to tell them, that they could not remaine in that countrie with the

pretence they had, for that there was a lawe ordayned to the contrarie, without expresse licence from the king, the which will last of all be granted vnto the Spaniardes or Portingals, for that there is a prophesie amongest thē, spoken by the mouth of the diuell, and estéemed amongest them for a very truth, for that other thinges which he spake when that was spoken hath béene verified, in the which he doth pronounce,* 1.59 that a time shall come, that they shall be subiect vnto a nation whose men shall haue great beardes and long noses, and sharpe broade eyes (as we would say cats eyes (in the which they do differ from them. For it is a great maruaile to finde a man amongst them, with more then twentie heares in his beard, little more or lesse, flat noses, and their eyes very little, so that when they will mocke a man, or doo him any iniurie by word, they will call him, cats eyes.

Now for that the desire of the Spaniardes was nothing else but to remaine in that countrie, for to bring to effect their good zeale, they did gratifie the interpreter for the great fauour hee shewed them, and did earnestly intreat him for to present the petition, thinking thereby their desire should be vnderstood, and Gods cause iustified, so that they first would enter into them by the way of preaching. He presented the petition when that all the Iudges were together, who had great pitie and compas∣sion ouer the Spaniardes, and willed that they should come before them, for that they would sée and vnderstande the roote and foundation of their will. They obeyed their commande∣ment with great ioy, and when they were come into the hall, one of the Iudges, who was superiour ouer all the rest, and a man of great authoritie, did aske of them by way of the inter∣preter, what was their pretence in that they did aske a house to dwell in, the Frier Costodio did answere, that he did desire it for to learne the language well, by which meanes they might the better learne them to know the true God, and to set them in the true way to goe and glorie with him, because it was his office and his profession.

The Interpreter tolde all this truely, the which fewe times before he had done, as hath béene tolde you. Then the Iudge in name of all the rest, sayde, that in that their demand they could not grant, neyther had they any such authoritie to giue licence.

This being spoken, the Interpreter replyed, without tarrying to heare what the Spaniardes would say, and said, that at least wayes they would giue them licence to remaine there till such time as the Portingals did come thether for to lade their mar∣chandice, which would be within few daies, with whom they would go, for that they were all of one law & faith. The Iudge did againe aske thē if that the Portingals & Spaniards were al one. The father Costodio answered, that in religion & lawes there was no difference, but the one were subiects to one king & the other to another, although they were kinsmen and tha•• ve∣ry nigh. This last petition seemed to the Iudge to be more rea∣sonable and iust than the first, and that they might grant it thē with lesse difficultie, although he answered them and said, that he could not grant it vnto them, but he would write vnto the viceroy for to grant it them. For that the Portugals would bee there at the farthest within foure or fiue moneths, & that in the meane time he would giue them a prouision that they may go fréely abroad, and none to hurt nor harme them.

So the next day following which was the second of August he did accomplish his word and promise and sent vnto the vice∣roy their petition, and therewithall his iudgement and of all the rest that were there with him, what they thought touching that matter. The answere staied many daies after & came not, but in the ende there came a commandement from the viceroy vnto the gouernor of Canton, in the which hee willed that the Spaniards should be sent vnto Aucheo whereas he was, and that there should be carried with them all such thinges as they brought with them, which was their bookes and ornaments. The Iudge did straightwaies send & gaue them to vnderstande of this new order, because they should make themselues readie for to trauaile: the which they did with great ioy and diligence, as you shall vnderstand in the chapter following.

CHAP. VII. The Spaniardes take their iourney towards Aucheo, & de∣clare what happened in the way thitherwarde.

THe next day following, which was the sixtéenth day of Au∣gust, the Spaniards departed frō Canton towards Aucheo

to sée the viceroy, with great hope and confidence that he would giue them licence for y^t which they pretended. But at their de∣parture they would haue left there two Indians for to kéepe their ship or frigat: but the Iudges that were present, said, that it was not néedefull for them to haue any such care, for that they would take the care vppon them to see all thinges in good order. So presently they sent certaine writing in papers, and commaunded them to bee glewed vppon the hatches of their shippe in such sort that they could not bee open, but they must be perceiued. Then presently was brought for the Spaniardes foure barkes verie gallant and wide with verie fayre galleries and windowes, and beeing imbarked, they charged them verie much to make all haste possible to accom∣plish the commandement of the viceroy, and sent with them conuenient persons for to be their guides, and to giue them all thinges necessarie for their iourney. They traueiled continu∣ally in a mightie riuer against the current, in the which they did sée many thinges woorthie to be noted for the space of foure daies that their iourney indured.

There was alongest the riuer side manie Cities and townes verie great, which were so many in number that they could not make any memorie of them, by reason that they passed manie of them by night. To obserue the tides, and to auoid the heate, which was great vppon the water. Alongest the riuer side (whereas it was not inhabited) was full of corne fieldes, whereas they sawe them go to plough with many Bu∣falos much different vnto the vse of Spaine, for that one a∣lonely buffe did drawe the plough, with one vpon his backe, who did gouerne and guide him with great ease whether hee would they should go, with a corde made fast to a ring at his nose which serued in steede of a bridle.

They sawe also flockes of géese, in the which were more then ••••entie thousand, with whom they did weede and tooke away the grasse which did growe amongst the rice, and other graine and seedes, driuing them in the middest of their fieldes, & it see∣med that they had the vse of reason, considering how they did separate and make a distinction betwixt the good seede and the bad, and the great care they had to feede and do no harme, nei∣ther to plucke vp the good plant, which was a thing that they

wondred at aboue all the rest. All the countrie is verie popu∣lous, and the townes one so néere an other, that it may better be sayde, to be all one towne and not manie, and might with more propertie be called the Citie of China, and not the king∣dome of China. In all the whole countrie there is not one foot of ground vnoccupied, by reason of the great abundance of peo∣people that there is, and they permit amongest them no idle people (as more at large it hath béene declared vnto you) and the countrie beeing fertile, is the occasion that they haue all thinges in great abundance and at a lowe price.

Now to returne to their voyage the which they made verie well and with great recreation as well in the townes alongst the riuer side, as vpon the riuer, whereas they were cherished with great care: in the end of foure dayes, which was the twentith day of August, they entred into the suburbes of the Citie of Aucheo, but so late that they were constrayned to re∣maine there till the next day: whereas they found all thinges necessarie and in good order, aswell for their bedding as for their supper, to passe away the night. The next day very early in the morning he that was their conduct and guide made great haste, for to goe and sée what the viceroy would command.

They trauailed through a great and long stréete, which sée∣med vnto them to be more than a league, and thought that they had gone through the citie. So when they had passed that street they came vnto the gate of the citie, and there they vnderstoode that the rest which they had gone and passed was the suburbes. The mightinesse of this citie, and the great admiration they had, with the multitude of people, & a wonderfull great bridge the which they passed, with many other thinges of the which they made mention, we do let passe, for that it is declared vnto you more at large in the relation giuen by the Augustin friers in the booke before this, at their entrie into the sayd citie.

So when they came to the pallace of the viceroy, he was not stirring, neither was the gate open, for as it hath béene tolde you, it is open but once a day. Their guide séeing that it would be somewhat long before that they would open it, he carried the Spaniardes into a court of an other house, which was ioyning vnto that of the viceroy.

In the meane while they were there, came all the Iudges to

sit in audience, but when they vnderstoode of the comming of the strangers, they commanded that they should be brought be∣fore them: who greatly marueiled at the aspernesse of their apparell, and not at any other thing, for that they had séene there before the Austin fryers. Straightwayes the gate of the pallace was open with great noyse of artilerie and musicall in∣struments, as trumpets, bagpipes, sackebuttes and hoybukes, with such a noyse that it séemed the whole citie would sincke. At the entrie in the first court, there were many souldiers ar∣med, and had hargubushes and lances, and in a very good order. In an other court more within, which was very great, & railed round about with timber, painted blacke and blew, which a far off séemed to be yron, and was in height a mans stature, there they sawe also many other souldiers, placed in the same order, and in liuerie as the others were, but they séemed to be men of a gallanter disposition. When they came into this court, there was brought vnto them a commandement from the viceroy, in the which they were commanded to returne and come thether againe in the after noone, for that he could not speake with thē before, by reason of certaine businesse he had with the Lords of the counsell, which could not be deferred. With this answere they departed out of the pallace, and returned againe in the af∣ter noone, as they were commanded, and into the same court a∣foresaide, out of y^e which they were carried into a mightie great hall, very richly hanged and adorned, at the ende thereof was thrée doores, that in the middest was great, but the other two but small, the which did correspond vnto other thrée doores, that were in an other hall more within, wherein was the viceroy, right ouer against the doore in the middest, in at y^t which there is none permitted to enter nor go foorth. Hee was set in a mar∣ueilous rich chayre wrought with iuorie and gold, vnder a ca∣nopie or cloth of state all of cloth of gold, & in the middest was embrodered the kings armes, which were (as we haue said) cer∣••aine serpents woond in a knot together. He had also before him a table whereon were two candles burning, for y^t it was some∣what late, and a standish with paper. Right before the viceroy the wall was verie white, whereon was painted a fearce dra∣gon, who did throwe out fire at his mouth, nose, and eyes, a picture (as was giuen them to vnderstand) that all the Iudges

of that countrie cōmonly hath it painted before their tribunall seates whereas they sit in Iustice, and is there to the intent to signifie vnto the Iustice, the fearcenesse that he should haue sit∣ting in that seat to do Iustice vprightly without feare or respect to any. The order they haue in giuing audience is with the ce∣remonies in all points as it hath béene shewed you in the rela∣tion of the fathers of S. Augustin. All people when they talke with the viceroy are knéeling on their knées, although they be Iudges or Loytias, as the Fryers did sée them many times.

This day they séeing that the Spaniardes remained looking alwaies when they should be cōmanded to enter in: the vice∣roy gaue audience vnto y^e scriueners or notaries, to certifie him selfe if they did their offices well, & commanded fiftie of them at that present to be sotted or beaten for that they were found cul∣pable in their detayning of matters, and others the like for that they had receiued gifts & bribes of their clyents▪ the wh••ch is prohibited and forbidden vnder gréeueous penalties, for that the king doth giue vnto thē all sufficient stipend for their main∣tenance, for that they should not incroch nor demand any thing of their clyentes. The sets or stripes which were giuen them were with great crueltie, and executed with certaine ca••es, and in that order as in other places it hath béene told you. The vice∣royes gard were in number more than two thousand men, pla∣ced all on a ranke, all apparelled in one liuery of silke, & on their heads helmets of yron very bright & glystering, and euerie one his plume of feathers. These souldiers made a lane from the gate of the hall there whereas the viceroy was, vnto the princi∣pal gate of the pallace wheras they did first enter. Those which were in the hals & vpon the staires had swords girt vnto thē & they in the courtes had lances, and betwixt euery one of them a hargubusher. All this gard (as was giuen them to vnderstand) were Tartaros and not Chinos: but the reason wherefore they could not learne, although they did inquire it with diligence.

CHAP. VIII. The Spaniards are brought before the viceroy: he asketh of them certaine questions, and doth remit them vnto the Timpintao his deputie, who receiueth them well, and giueth them good speeches.

AT that present came forth a seruant of the viceroyes, a mā of authoritie, and made signe vnto the Spaniards to enter into the hall instructing them that at the first entry they should knéele downe on their knées: the which they did presently, from that place vnto the seat of the viceroy was more thā a hundreth foot in length: yet did the viceroy himself make signes with his hand that one of the religious men should come nearer him, the which the father Costodio did, and knéeled downe againe whē he drew nigh vnto the table that was before him. The viceroy did consider and beholde him a good while, and that with great grauitie & maiestie, and then asked him of whence he was, and what he came to seeke in that kingdome, into the which none might come vpō paine of death, without expresse licence of some of the Iudges alongst the sea coast. The father Costodio an∣swered, that he and the rest of his companions were Spaniards and that they were come into that kingdome, mooued with the zeale of God, for the saluation of their soules, & for to preach the holy gospell, & show thē the way vnto heauen. Hauing declared the interpreter this (although they did not vnderstand whither he did vse fidelitie in the declaration or not, but rather by that, which the viceroydid forthwith demand, it is to be beléeued, that he did it with falshood as he had done many times before) for y^e without replying vnto that which he had saide of the preaching of y^e gospel, he asked them what marchandice they brought with thē: the said father answered, that they brought none, for y^t they were not men that did deale in any marchandice, but in decla∣ring of things appertaining to heauen, & to direct their soules to that place. Hearing this answere (or that which the interpreter would imagine to be better for his purpose) the viceroy did bid them depart, & commanded them to returne againe y^e next day and to bring with them their Images, & the other things wher∣of he was certified from Canton, that were founde in their fri∣gat, for that he would sée it all They did accomplish his cōman∣dement, & returned the next day in the morning at such time as it was tolde them that the pallace gates would be opened: the which was done in the same maner & order as the day before, with the noyse of musicke and artillerie as aforesaid. So when that the viceroy was giuen to vnderstande how that the Ca∣stillos were come, he cōmanded that one of them with alonely

the interpreter should enter there wheras he was, and to bring in such thinges as he had commanded to be brought. the which was presently accomplished. Hee straightwaies began to looke vpon the images euery one by it selfe, and the bookes: & made a stay betwixt euerie one, to consider well thereof, and made a showe of great content he receiued in the sight of thē. Although aboue all the rest, the Ara of blacke Iasper did most content him, and caused a marueilous strangenesse in the rest of the Iudges that had séene it. All this while was the father Costo∣dio vpon his knées, and the interpreter by him, and hee neuer asked of thē any question, neyther did they say any thing. They that did bring those thinges vnto him for to sée them, seemed to be principall and ancient men, who when they gaue it him into his handes they did it knéeling.

So after that he had seene them al at his pleasure, he cōman∣ded to put them againe in the place that they were taken out, and made signe vnto the father Coistodio & to the interpret••r y^t they should depart and to carry with thē al those things which they had brought. One of the ancient men that were with him, did go foorth with the Spaniards, & told them when they came into the second hall, that the viceroy did reioyce much to see thē, and all those which they brought, & said that they should repaire vnto y^e Timpintao, who was his deputy, & he would dispatch al such matters as were asked of the viceroy by petition following the same till it was concluded, & that he would consult with the viceroy, who would set down such orders as shold be obserued. They straightwaies did put in execution this order, & cōming vnto the house of the deputie vnto the viceroy, the which was very great & faire, they found that he had a garde very little lesse then y^t of the viceroy, & almost with as great maiestie. So after they had remained in the court a good while, abiding his cōmā∣dement (to whom it was giuen to vnderstand y^t the viceroy had sent them vnto him) he cōmanded them to ascend into the place wheras he was, which was into a hall very well dressed, in the which was almost al such things as they had séene in the hall of the viceroy, and he himselfe in the same manner sate in a rich chaire, with a table before him. He cōmanded to take out those things which they brought in their chestes, and did behold them with great consideration péece by péece, as the viceroy had done,

and reioysing much to sée the Images, he did demande of them with curiositie the signification of some of them, but in espe∣ciall a crucifixe, that after that he had considered with great at∣tention, he asked what man was that, which was vppon the crosse, and what those letters did signifie that were tituled ouer his head. But when the father Costodio had declared it vnto him, he beganne to laugh thereat, as though he had heard some foolish fable. Hee came and féeled the habites of our religious men, and made signes of great woonder to see the aspernesse thereof.

The father Costodio séeing his affabilitie, and as it séemed by outwarde showe that he did very much pitie them, he reque∣sted to helpe and fauour him with the viceroy, & that he would aske licence that they might remaine and dwell in that coun∣trie, in any place where his pleasure was to appoint, for y^t they were men without any hurt, and would put all their care and diligence to do workes of charitie, and to procure y^e men might go to inioy the happie estate to the which they were borne.

The interpreter dealt here in his office with as great fideli∣tie as at other times, in saying that which the fathers did re∣quest of him, was that he should be a meanes vnto the viceroy that he would let them to remaine in that countrie two or thrée moneths, for that as thē it was an ill time to nauigate the sea, and that without great danger of their liues they could not re∣turne vnto the Ilands Philippinas. The Iudge answered that they should not feare, but remaine with content, for y^t he would procure that there should be giuen thē a house for those thrée or foure moneths, with a commandement that none whatsoeuer should do them any harme. The Interpreter tolde them y^t the deputie to the viceroy was very glad y^t they would remaine in that countrie, for y^t they séemed vnto him men of good example & necessarie in their cōmon weale, & that they might fréely learne the language (as they sayd) for to shew & instruct them the way vnto heauen. The Spaniards hauing heard this, if made them very much to maruaile, & frō that time forwards they had good hope to prosecute that which they did pretend. So with this & with great spirituall & corporal ioy they tooke their leaue of the Iudge, and went vnto their lodging, wheras they gaue thanks vnto God, for the good directing of their busines, & did pray vnto

him to helpe thē, that they might sée a finall conclusion of their desire. All this falsenes that the interpreter did vse, was by the diuine permission (as afterwards they did gather) when that by himselfe they were put out of all doubt, and did declare what he did pretend by the way & order he tooke. For without all doubt, if that the Iudges had plainly vnderstood that they would haue there remained, they would not haue suffered them to haue en∣tred and séene the countrie. And the viceroy being aduertised thereof, would haue caused them to depart in that troublesome wether, whereas possible they should haue béene all drowned, for that the moneths of Iuly, August and September, in that countrie are ordinarily full of stormes and tempestes.

CHAP. IX. The Spaniards remained certaine daies in Aucheo: they go to visite the beautie of that citie, but in especiall the cap∣taine generall of the sea, who was so affectioned vnto the Ara of blacke stone they brought, that hee did with all care and diligence procure it of gift.

ALl the time that they remained in Aucheo, they did occu∣pie thēselues in visiting of the principals of y^t court, amōgst whom he that did most reioice to see them was the captaine ge∣nerall of the men of war of that prouince, who after that he had intreated them very friendly and louingly, he desired them that they would returne the next day to visite him, & to bring with them the Ara of blacke stone, which they had shewed vnto the viceroy, that he might sée it, for that he had praised it very much: and to bring also of their painted Images. They did obey his commandement, and came vnto him when that he was at din∣ner with great maiestie. Then so soone as he had dined he com∣manded that they should enter into the hal there where he was. The interpreter when he drew nigh vnto him did knéele down, and made signes vnto the Spaniards to follow him and do the like, but the captaine commanded them to arise & to couer their heads, & did very much behold the Ara or (altar stone) making a showe of great admiration to beholde it: hee demanded of the Fryers many things of great curiositie, and asked them if they would sell him that stone, and he would giue them for it what

they would demande. The father Costodio answered saying, that they solde nothing, and much lesse that, for that it was con∣secrated and dedicated to the diuine colto (or sacrifice.) The Captaine replied and saide, that if they would not sell it, that they should giue it him, and hee would be gratefull vnto them in some other thing, that they should thinke well of.

The father Costodio answered that by no maner of meanes he could not do it, for that vpon the same they did celebrate and say masse, at such time as they did sacrifice vnto the true God. At that instant the captaine did put his handes vppon it to féele it, and the father Costodio made signes vnto him to take away his handes, for that he sinned greatly therein. Then he séeing that they would not giue it him, he tooke his leaue, say∣ing, that they should leaue it there with him, for that hee would looke vppon it more at leasure, promising to returne it them againe afterwardes. The father Costodio did consent thereunto, but first he requested him, not to touch it with his handes.

So after that he had satisfied himselfe in the beholding of it, his affection was then much more to remaine therewith: and for to accomplish the same, not fayling of his word and promise that he had made, hee deuised with himselfe a certaine slight and policie, and sent for the father Costodio, who came vnto him with great content, thinking verily that he would haue re∣turned their Ara. When he came vnto him, he did intertaine him verie ioyfully and said that he was vpon his iorney to cer∣tain warres by the commandement of the king, & that amongst those seruants that he carried with him for his seruice, there were two christened Chinos, which had beene captiues vnto the Portugales of the citie of Machao, from whence they ran away, of whom he had had vnderstanding in all thinges of the ceremonies of the Christians, and that their comming the∣ther was to baptise such as would receiue the same: and hee being fully certified in many thinges touching the same he li∣ked well thereof and gaue great content, and hoped to be one of them that first should receiue the faith when the king should grant licence for the same.

All this (as it séemed was that they should let him haue the Ara, vnto the which he was so affectioned, as aforesaid. But

the father Costodio vsed the matter in such sort that hee got it out of his fingers, which was no small matter. Within a few dayes after, the Captaine being readie to imbarke himselfe for to make his iourney, he sent vnto the Spaniardes that two of them should come vnto him, and that they should bring with them the blacke stone, for there were certaine friendes of his that would sée it.

The father Costodio did straightwayes accomplish his commandement and carried with him the Ara (or altar stone) for that he durst not do otherwise, yet they did beléeue that in giuing him some pretie or curious thing, they should content him and quiet his mind: they carried also with them the Image of Marie Magdalen made of feathers, which was more woor∣thie than the Ara, (setting a part the consecration). So whē the religious fathers came wheras he was, he went foorth to méete them more then tenne paces, with signification of great ioy: and carrying them aside, he saide vnto them once againe, that the captiues had told him so many things of their vertuous ma∣ner of liuing, & of other things touching the heauen: that he had great affection vnto them, & desired that they might remaine in the countrie for to baptise the inhabitants therof, & that he wold be the first: but the cause wherfore he did delay the time is for to eschew the paines y^t is pronounced against all those that do re∣ceiue any law or strange ceremonie without particular licence of the king. And for that he went in hast to go & inhabite a cer∣taine prouince, & that he was ready to depart: in y^e which so soone as it was possible, he would do so much y^t al they should become Christians: & for as much as he tolde him that the blacke stone (vnto the which he was affectioned) was consecrated, that he would let him haue it to carry with him, that he might put it in the first church that the baptised should edifie being made chri∣stians: the which would be very shortly, for y^t he was determi∣ned before many daies to send to Machao for two friers such as were there, to be fully informed of them in thinges touch∣ing the Christian faith. Then the father Costodio sayde, if that which he had spoken came from his heart, that hee would foorth with depart and goe with him and all his companie.

The Captaine answered that as then hee could not doo it, till such time as the Church was built, and licence had for the

same of the king or vizroy, the which at that time he coulde not demande, for the great hast that he had to depart. The father Costodio replied and said, that his church being built, he would promise him of his worde to sende it him, and not to giue it to any other, and in pledge and token of the same, he should carry with him the Image of Marie Magdalene made of feathers. The captaine receiued the same with great content: greatlie maruelling at the subtill and fine worke, wherewith it was wrought: and after did so much, that almost perforce he remai∣ned also with the Ara: and commanded to bee brought foorth two rich péeces of Damaske, and to giue them vnto the Father Costodio for to make an ornament in truck and ful satisfacti∣on for the same: but the father Costodio woulde not receiue them, but was very much gréeued to sée howe that hee did re∣maine therewith, and with the Image of feathers. The Cap∣taine did contende with him for to take the Damaske, but hée would not.

Afterward they vnderstood that that the interpreter was bri∣bed by a seruant of the Captaines, for to alter the friers words and to offer the captayne the Ara, and any thing els that hee would desire. For to the contrary he durst not by any meanes to take it against the will of the fathers. To conclude he did imbarke himselfe vpon his voyage, and caried with him the Ara, and the image with great ioy to himselfe: but vnto the fathers and their companions discomfort and sorrow, for that they had lost the two thinges that they so much estéemed. The captayne at his departure did vse great thinges and curtesie, taking his leaue of them, with signes, that signified he bare them great loue and good will, and that it gréeued him to de∣part, and could not carie them with him as they requested.

The interpreter did comfort the Spaniardes, and sayd that they should not be sorrowfull that the captaine had taken those two pieces, for that he was a mightie prince, and that he would fauour and helpe them with the vizroy, and that hee was cer∣taine that he would accomplish that which he promised, that is to become a christian, for that he did beare great good will and affection vnto them: in the which the interpreter did not lie, for that it was told them by the seruants of the Captaine, that were christened, a I told you before.

The Frier Costodio remained so sad and sorowfull for the carrying away of the Ara and Madlin of feathers, as though he had lost a great treasure: and being desirous to recouer them againe, he did recommend the same vnto S. Antonio de Pa∣dua, who for thinges that were lost, they knewe by expe∣rience to bee the onely saint for aduocate, and did promise (the better to obtaine their desire) for to celebrate vnto him certaine masses, when they should come into place fit for the same.

Straightwayes it so fell out that the chiefe and principall in∣terpreter did fall out with the other that did helpe him, about certaine pro••ite that was comming to him, and did threaten him that he would tell the gouernor, howe that they had giuen him much siluer for to conclude the matter about the Ara, for that the fathers had giuen it them more by force then any good will. The interpreter fearing that hee shoulde bée for the same gréeuously punished, and finding himselfe culpable in y^e things that the other threatned him for, he went vnto the captain, who was imbarked and readie to depart, tarrying onely for wether, and tolde him the falling out in all points as it passed, and of his threatnings: who likewise fearing what might succéede or happen, if it shoulde come to the vnderstanding of the Aytao of the cittie of Canton, as coulde not be by any meanes excu∣sed: hee called vnto him one of his seruants and commanded him to take the Ara and the Image, and to carry them vnto the Fathers, who accomplished his commande, and they receiued them with great comfort, and gaue great thankes vnto God for the same, and S. Antonio de Padua: by whose intercession they beléeued that they were restored.

CHAP. X. The Timpintao dooth call the Spaniards before him, and dispatcheth them for to go to Canton: they tooke their leaue of him, and goeth from Aucheo: and at their com∣ming to Canton, they are commaunded to make them∣selues readie to depart the kingdome.

THe next day following which was the thirde day of Sep∣tember, the Timpintao did sende to call the Spaniards

before him: who as we haue said was deputie vnto the vizroy, and he gaue them certaine dispatches, in saying, that there was in them all that they did aske, and gaue commandement to the gouernor of Canton that he should not neglect, but accomplish al things therin comprehended, so that they might depart when they pleased. When hee tooke his leaue of them, hee did intreate them verie curteously with words of great curtesie. The Spa∣niards departed his presence with incredible ioy: beléeuing that he had agréed and granted all that they did aske, and to re∣maine in the countrie to preach, so that the next day following they made all thinges in a redinesse to take their voyage, the which they finished in short time, by reason of their great con∣tentment they had with themselues, as also for the good inter∣tainement and good cheere they had by the way, which was made and giuen them by the commandemēt of the Timpintao.

So when they came vnto Canton, they went straightwayes to visite the gouernour, and to giue him the dispatches which they brought, who after that he had read the same, he bad them welcome, and saide that hee was very glad that the vizroy had shewed them so much fauour, and that the same was commit∣ted to his charge, for the execution of his commission, that they should perswade themselues that hee would performe it accor∣ding vnto his commandement, without failing anie thing. And for to beginne the same, hee shewed vnto them a house of the kings which should be for their dwelling, which was in the suburbs halfe fallen downe, and there they were lodged, with a commandement that they should not go foorth, neither enter into the cittie without particular licence. Héere they remained many dayes being deceiued of their purpose, and maruelled very much that the gouernor would not giue them licence for to reedifie a monastery, neither for to enter into the cittie for to giue order in that which they beléeued was granted them by the vizroy, til such time as they vnderstood what was done by their interpreters, & relation giuen by the Chino boy which came w^t them from the Philippinas, who declared to thē the truth in all things: how y^e the interpreters had neuer told the Iudges how that they would remain in the countrie, neither made any mē∣tion thereof, but that they came thither as lost men, & that their request was to remaine in the country til it were faire wether,

or the comming of the Portugall shippes. And this was that which the vizroy and his deputie had granted, and no other thing. But when the father Costodio and his companions (who verely beléeuing that their desire woulde take effect) vn∣derstoode the craft and wile of the interpreters, and the great fashood that they had vsed, they were very sadde, and beganne amongst themselues to remedie the same: so they determined to séeke a new interpreter, one that should faithfulle and true∣ly declare their will vnto the gouernor, And although they did finde some that could doo it, for that they did reasonably vnder∣stande the Portugall tongue, yet there were none that woulde accept it, for any request or giftes that they did promise them. The Father Costodio séeing this, and that the time appointed did passe away without doing of any thing, one day hee and the rest of his companions did ioine togither, & entred in coun∣sell to sée what was best to be done, according vnto the necessi∣tie in the which they were driuen. There was amongst them diuers opinions, for that of the father Costodio and of ano∣ther religious man was, that they woulde go vnto Machao, which was not farre off, and there would administer the sacra∣ments, and preach the holy Gospel vnto the christened Chinos and to learne the China language, and to tarrie there and a∣bide the first occasion that should bee offered, or else they them∣selues to procure it, for hauing the language it were an easie thing to doo it: & they should not haue néede of any interpreter, neither feare to be deceiued as they had béene before. And be∣sides this, they put the Portugals out of all doubt of the false opinion that the Captaine generall had published abroade of them, and of other matters of like effect and purpose. The other two religious men and soulders were of a contrarie opinion: which was, that they should returne vnto the Ilands Philip∣pinas, and not vnto Machao, and saide, that they had departed without licence of the gouernor, and did aduenture themselues into the harme and damage that might happen vnto them by that enterprise, and all for to plant the faith of Christ in that kingdome. And now séeing that by the iust iudgement of God wee cannot put it in execution, wee are greatly bounde to re∣turne againe vnto him, of whome we doubt not but with ease to get our pardon for the error passed, representing the zeale

wee had to the honour of God, and the saluation of so manie soules, who did incite vs to giue that great enterprise: with the which we shall remaine blamelesse with them that had giuen wrong iudgement of vs, and accomplish our bounden duetie and obedience which wee doo owe vnto the gouernor. And in going vnto Machao wée shall runne in great danger to be hol∣den and iudged for traitors to the king: and the intent where∣with wee went vnto China, euery one wil construe and inter∣pret thereon at his pleasure.

The resolution of these contrary opinions, was by a com∣mon consent delated certaine dayes, in the which they prayed vnto God to put into their hearts, that which was best for his deuine seruice. So in the end the father Costodio, and the re∣ligious man, who was of his opinion, did determine to go for∣wards with their pretence, and to go vnto Machao, as afore∣said, and the rest to returne vnto the Ilands with the first opor∣tunitie they might finde: but when it should come to effect, one of the religious Friers that shoulde haue gone vnto Manilla was deade of an infirmitie that chanced him. They staied there longer then they did think they should, by reason that y^e Iudges of the Cittie were occupied with the examinations of students the which is accustomed euery thrée yeares, and is in that man∣ner and order, as hath béene tolde you in the proper chapter for the same: the which examinations endured more then fiue and fortie dayes with great feastes and banquets, without medling in any other particular businesse.

CHAP. XI. The Father Costodio sendeth a messenger vnto Machao he he writeth vnto the bishop and vnto a priest for to bestow their almes on them for their departure. The captaine generall doth vnderstand therof, and commandeth them not to aid nor succour the Spaniards, and other matters appertaining vnto them.

IN the meane time of this their examination, the father Co∣stodio did sende a messenger vnto the bishop of Machao, de∣claring vnto him his determination, and he also did write vn∣to the deuout priest, of whome we haue made mention before:

and craued of them their almes wherewith they might make prouision for them that would depart for the Ilands Philippi∣nas, and how that he and his companyon would go and see his lordship. This was not done so secretly, but it came vnto the vnderstanding and knowledge of the captaine generall of the Portugals, who with great choller went and demanded the letters of the priest, those that were giuen him by the Chino: threatning him that if hee did not, hee woulde punish him with great rigor, and banish him out of the countrie as a suspected person. He answered him, that of truth he had receiued certaine letters, but that at the very instant hee sent them vnto the Bi∣shoppe vnto whome they were directed: about the which there was great holde and kéepe, vntill it came to effect that the cap∣taine did lay holde vppon the priest for to apprehende him: but when the bishop vnderstood thereof, hee with all spéed possible went to remedy the danger that might insue, and to take him out of his power.

The captaine séeing that hee could not perseuer with his in∣tent and purpose, he made many notifications vnto the bishop, requiring that he would not permit that any letters shoulde bée receiued from those religious Spaniards, for that he knew by very certaine relation that they were spies, and no friers, and if so be that any damage should happen vnto them, by their or∣der, that hée woulde lay the whole fault vppon him as a con∣senter and a helper. The bishoppe answered that he was fully perswaded and certified that they were true religious men, and seruants of God, and that he with a very good will would take vpon him the burthen of any damage that should happen to the country by their meanes, or vnto the king of Portugall. With this the captaine was somewhat quieted, but not so much, but that continually hee did not let to imagine newe matters a∣gainst the poore fathers, to haue occasion to apprehend them, and imagined in his minde for to write a letter vnto the inter∣preters, in the which hee did offer them great quantities of mo∣ny, if that they would do so much as giue order that the Iudges woulde sende the religious men and Spanish souldiers that were in Canton vnto the Cittie of Machao, aduertising them howe and which way they shoulde vse the matter to put it in effect, and was, that he should tell the Iudges, that the first time

when as they went to speake with the gouernor, whereas they did aske and say that they would depart for the Ilands Philip∣pinas, that they did interpret it contrary, for that their demand was for to go vnto Machao.

The interpreters straightwayes (with the desire of gaine) did take the charge vppon them, and did vse the matter in such sort that the Iudges did sende them vnto Machao, whether it were with or against their willes. But God, who woulde not permit those his seruantes and Christians to bee deceiued, re∣medied the same at such time as it should haue béene put in exe∣cution, in the manner as you shall vnderstande in the Chapter following.

CHAP. XII. A Portugall of the Cittie of Macheo doth discouer the euill intent of the captaine general: he giueth the Spaniards warning thereof by a letter without seale, by the which they remedie the danger that was so nigh at hand: they are called before the Aytao of the Cittie, & he declareth vnto them such matters as haue passed with him, and the licence that was graunted for some of them to go vnto Machao, and the other vnto Luzon.

BEing vnderstood by a Portugall a good Christian of the towne of Machao, of such things as the captaine generall did imagine against the poore religious fathers that were in Canton, and their companions the souldiers, of whose holie zeale, he was fully certified, and being gréeued at the very soule that one Christian shoulde hurt and harme another: and more in the disturbing of the saluation of soules, hée determined with himselfe to giue them aduice therof with all spéed that was pos∣sible, as in effect hee did by sending them a letter without anie name: wherein he gaue them to vnderstand that the Captaine generall by meanes of the interpreters, did pretende that they should be sent thither wheras he might apprehend them, & send them vnto the king of Portugall, or else to doo some hurt vnto their person, with some false information, and willed them to be wel aduised, & to kéepe themselues from the deceit ordained.

The letter being séene, and wel aduised of all that was there∣in contained: they determined to giue notice thereof vnto a Chino, a verie friende of theirs, and perfite in the Portugall tongue: whome diuers times they prooued by experience, and founde him a very honest man, and one that had doone them friendshippe: who promised them that before many houres, he would bring al things to light, and to know whether that were true or not.

So with this desire he went there whereas the Iudge did sit in audience, and was there as one that knew nothing, vntill such time as he saw come thither one of the interpreters with a petition in his hand, and presented it vnto the supreme Iudge, who was the Aytao, the which being read by a scriuener, hée prouided that all things should be granted and doone, that was therein contained. This petition the Chino aforesaid saw, and after that the interpreter was departed with contentment, and found that in the same petition he did request (in the name of the Spaniards) of the Iudge to giue them leaue for to go vnto Ma∣chao, which was more for their purpose then to go vnto the I∣lands Philippinas, which was granted by the iudge, and lack∣ing nothing but to seale or signe the petition, but was dela∣ted vntill the euening, by reason of certaine businesse that chan∣ced at that present: but sure it was the ordinance of God, for that if it had béene signed, they must néeds of force haue accom∣plished the same, without any replication. So with this cer∣taintie he went straightwayes vnto the Spaniards, to whom the interpreter had told that by petition he had asked licence for them to go to the Ilands Philippinas from whence they came, but the Iudge woulde not graunt vnto that, but for to go vnto Machao, which was néerer hand, who commanded them to ac∣complish the same without any replication, vppon paine that they should be carried thither perforce.

The Spaniards asked councell of the Chino their friende, what meanes might be taken to auoide the danger that the in∣terpreter had begun to bring them in, and was alredie gone to conclude the same. The Chino said that he was fully perswa∣ded that the Aytao loued them well, and that he vnderstood hée did them great fauour and curtesie to graunt vnto the petition the which the interpreter did present in their name. But not∣withstanding

for so much as it was not signed, there was reme∣die to bee had: if that they woulde present another which hee would giue them, and go presently vnto the Aytao and present the same, and say when they giue it him, that they woulde go vnto Luzon and not vnto Machao, and that he himselfe would go with them for the good will he bare vnto them, if it were not for the great paine that is put vppon all them, whosoeuer that shall speak for any stranger, without licence of the Iustice, or is called and ordained for the same. So they being fully perswa∣ded in this conclusion, with the petition made & all ready, there entred in at the gate wheras they were, a seruant to the Aytao, who in the behalfe of his master, came to cal the Spaniards to come before him, for that he would sée and talke with them be∣fore their departure. They straightwayes went forth in his cō∣pany, and came vnto the gates of the cittie, after they had gon a good wayes in the suburbs: and there they were staied till such time as another came and brought their licence, writtē vpon a table (in such sort as in other places it hath béene told you.) So whē they had passed the gate, they passed thorough a long stréet, in the which they saw so great riches, & of so great curiosity, that the father Costodio with great admiration said, I haue béene in the principallest citties of all Flanders and Italie, and in all them I haue not séene so great curiositie and riches, as in this stréete alone: and according vnto the report of them all, hee had great reason to maruell thereat. So they comming vnto the end of this stréete, and in sight of another gate, they sawe that the souldiers which kept and garded the same, did shut them in their presence with great hast, and let fall a percullis of yron before the gate, and demanded to sée their licence at a window out of the saide percullis: and when they had it, although they saw with them the seruant of the Aytao and the interpreter, yet would they not open the gate vntill such time as it was ac∣knowledged and newe firmed by another Iudge, the which be∣ing done, they presently did open the gates & did conduct them vnto the house of one which is to be compared to a Iudge of the court, & called in their language Tequisi, that he might go with them to the Aytao, for so it was commanded & ordained. Unto this Tequisi they gaue their petition that they had made, with∣out giuing the interpreter to vnderstand therof, requesting him

by signes & some words which they had learned of the language that he woulde giue it to the Aytao, & to procure that hee might accept & grant that which by y^e same they did demand: but whē they gaue it him, it caused great alteration in the interpreter, for that they told the Iudge y^t he was a théefe & a traitor, & how that he had sold them to the captaine general of Machao, & how that hee had presented a petition in their name: howe that they would go thither, & not to the Iland of Luzon, where all their desire is to returne, and this hath he done by gifts that the saide captaine general hath promised to giue him, if that he do accom∣plish his desire. The Tequisi when he heard this, he forthwith departed with vs from his owne house, towards the house of the Aytao which was hard by, and as he went by the way he read their petition, and sawe that it was different to that which the interpreter had giuen before vnto the Aytao, he being present: whereat he made a s••ay & began to consider of the same, as also of that which the Spaniards had said vnto him, at such time as they gaue him their petition, for by the signes and tokens they made, as by their semblant in spéech, it séemed to him, that they were maruellously indigned against the interpreter, but he did not wel vnderstand them, for that they could not plainly declare it in their language, till such time as hee found the contrarietie that was in the petitions & the turbation of y^e interpreter, whom presently hee called vnto him, and asked him what the matter was: hee trembling for feare, answered and saide that hée vn∣derstood that the father Costodio (whome all the rest doo obey as their head, and with whom he alonely did comunicate) that it was his pleasure, and gaue order to go vnto Machao, and that hee was certaine that all the rest were of that opinion, wherein he thought he had done well, and therefore he presen∣ted that petition in asking licence, whereby they might doo it liberallie, with this discharge: and againe the Spaniards séeing how he was terrified, and how that he requested them so hum∣blie they would not procéede any farther with their complaint, wherewith the Tequisi was satisfied, who said vnto the Spa∣niards being in the gallerie of the Aytao his house, that they shoulde tarry there, and hee entred in with the petition in his hand. So within a while after they were commanded to enter into the hall there whereas the Iudges were, and had séene the

petition and comoned about the same. And at their entring in∣to the hall whereas the Aytao was, there were signes made vnto them that they should knéele downe, the which they did almost twenty paces before they came to the table that was be∣fore him: hee had in hande the petition that Tequisi had giuen vnto him, and although that he had read it before, yet did he re∣turne and looked againe vppon it, and asked which were they that would go vnto Machao. The father Costodio signified himselfe and frier Iohn Baptista his companion, and said, that they for that they were old and timorous of the sea, they would go thither for that it was nearer hande, and howe that the rest that were not of such yeares, neither so timorous, they woulde returne vnto the Iland of Luzon from whence they came, and there dwell with other of their brethren and friends that were there. The interpreter whose euill conscience did accuse him, for the euils which he had done, was so timorous, that all men might sée plainly his default, and without al doubt the Iustices are so right in executing the same, that if their complaint had gone forwards, they would haue punished him and his compa∣nion and that very cruelly: but the religious Friers woulde not consent that the souldiers shoulde declare against them al∣though their will was good, but thought it a sufficient punish∣ment to sée in what affliction the poore men were in, and tooke pittie on them.

The Aytao was desirous to sée their Images and book which was the chiefest occasion wherefore hee sent to call them, and when he saw them he receiued great content, and called the Fa-Costodio to come nigh vnto him, and asked the signification of some of them, such as séemed vnto him most strangest, and being satisfied thereof, hee commanded the Frier Costo∣dio to reade on one of these bookes, hée harkening vnto it with great attention, and as one amased to sée those letters, and the forme of them so farre different vnto theirs, which are all in manner of caractes, as hath béene told you. So after that they had passed away the time a while in this, hee saide, that those which woulde go vnto Machao shoulde put themselues on the one side, and they that woulde go vnto Luzon on the other: the which being doone hee tooke his leaue of them verie louinglie, and saide that hee would giue them the licence which

they did aske at all times whensoeuer they woulde, & although hee coulde not grant it them without first to consult with the vizroy of Aucheo, yet he would doo it within tenne dayes, and then those which woulde go vnto Macheo might presently de∣part, and those which would go vnto Luzo, he would send them vnto Chincheo, that from thence the gouernour shoulde cause them to be sent in the first passage that goeth with merchan∣dice.

This Aytao was very peaceable and humaine, who hauing compassion on the Spaniards, for that they séemed vnto him to be good men: he commanded to bee giuen to them ouer & aboue the kings alowance, a Hogge and Rice and other kind of victu∣als. So here with they went vnto their lodgings with content, and also the interpreter, who thought that hée was new borne againe that day.

CHAP. XIII. The Spaniards remaine certaine dayes in Canton, whither came certaine Portugals from Machao: at the first they feared them, but afterwards they were assured by the contractation they had the one with the other, that they were friendes: the vizroy of Aucheo commeth to Can∣ton, and dispatcheth the Spaniards, & giueth them good prouision and intertainment.

AFter that the ten daies were past appointed by the Aytao, and some more, & séeing that no more mention was made of them, but as though they had neuer séene thē, they were very sorowfull, & in ielousie that the captaine general of Machao a∣foresaide had knowledge howe that his craft and subtiltie was discouered, & thereupon to begin & frame some other: procuring for an instrument in the performing of the same, some Iudge or some other person of power and authoritie. So they being with this care & discontent: there came vnto the cittie of Can∣ton foure Portugals to buy & sell merchandice, with a safe con∣duct which they had for y^e same, which was y^e occasion y^t their so∣row & trouble increased, suspecting what might happen confor∣mable to y^e aduise which they had from thence: but for y^t they did comon & visit thē many times w^t intent to discouer their minds

the one vnto the other, they presently did forget the euill suspe∣ction that they had of them, and not onely that, but they did giue them great almes and charitie, helping and aiding them in all things, as it was méete and reason amongst Christians. So being void of their first care, they put all their diligence and care in their departure: and seeing that there was no mention made thereof by reason that the Iudges were occupied in mu∣stering the souldiers of that circuit in a great and mightie field whereas they were trained vp in Military exercises, some shoo∣ting in bowes, some with hargabushes, tossing the pike, run∣ning of horses, and many other exercises mo: and after that they had many different proofes, as well of thinges past, as at that present, they ordained Captaines, such as were aduanced aboue all the rest, and most worthy: all which being finished, the Spaniards determined to put the Aytao in remembrance of his promise, & the better y^t they might doo it, and with most breuitie, they ordained a petition, and went with the same vnto the house of the Aytao, therewith to aske licence to put it in vre. The first Iudge they met withall was the Tequisi afore∣said, who made signes that they should come vnto him, and as∣ked of them what they would haue. The father Costodio an∣swered, nothing but onely to present that petition vnto the Ay∣tao, to put him in minde of their departure, the Tequisi did take the petition, promising them to giue it vnto him presently, the which he did accomplish in a short space. So being read by the Aytao, he made answere by the same petition, that he had a particular care of them, and tarried onely for order from the vizroy, which could not tarrie long: the receiuing whereof hée woulde aduertise them, the which hee did accomplish in fewe dayes, which came with great content vnto the Spaniards, for that he commanded that they should be sent away in verie good order, and to giue them all that was néedfull for their iourney, and that in aboundance. The same day that this commission came, there came also newes that the vizroy would come vnto the cittie of Canton▪ and that within few dayes hee would bée there: the which did so much trouble the Aytao & the rest of the Iudges, that day & night they neuer rested, but were occupied in the preparing al things necessary to receiue him, which were so many & with so great maiestie as though the king in person

should come thither: with great and mighty triumphall arkes, rich hangings, with other things, the which I do not here make mention of, although they were very curious, because I would not be tedious, for that I haue a great desire to conclude this lit∣tle historie: and if I should declare all that passed therin, it were requisite for the same alone to make a great volume.

Foure dayes after the comming of the vizroy, by his order, there was giuen both to the one & to the other a prouision, in the which he commanded all Iudges and gouernors to receiue the Spaniards into their iurisdictions, whereas they should passe & not to permit any to do them harme or iniury, but to giue them frée passage with securitie till such time as they should come to y^e place appointed in y^e said prouision, which was vnto Machao & vnto Luzon: and iointly therewith he commanded two cap∣taines to beare them company til such time as they had brought them out of all danger. And to giue vnto them that went vnto Machao (which was thrée daies iourney) sufficient prouision requisite for fiue dayes: and to them that went to Luzon, their prouision for forty dayes, although the voyage is to be made in fifteene dayes, & in twentie dayes at the most. He also comman∣ded them that had the charge to carry them, that they shoulde haue a special care vnto their healthes, in trauelling not too fast but little and little. Likewise the Aytao gaue order vnto the interpreters for to sell the frigat, in the which the fathers came thither, and to giue vnto them the price that shoulde bee made thereof, to bestow it at their pleasure: the whi••h they did▪ but kept still the halfe of that which they solde it ••or•• and with manyother things m••, which by the commandemēt of the viz∣roy was giuen them for their iourney, and thought it well be∣stowed on them, for to sée thēselues free of their lyings & crafts. At the departure of the Father Costodio, one of the souldiers mind was altred, who was called Pedro de Villa roel and was very desirous to go with him vnto Machao, the which h••e did accomplish by apparelling himself in the habite of a Portugal, because he had no licence to go otherwise. So all things being in a redinesse for their iourney, they tooke their leaue the one of the other in shedding many teares with the griefe of minde.

The Father Costodio and his companions came safely and in health to Machao in foure dayes, as himselfe did afterwards

write thereof, and were very well receiued of the Bishop, and of all the rest: and within fewe dayes after they gaue them a place for to build a monasterie, wherein he and his companion might liue, and all such as should take the habite of that order. They came thither the fiftéenth of Nouember.

And those which went vnto Luzon departed out of the cittie of Canton in a great barke, of the which there are many in all that kingdome, very well tilted and dressed, with many roomes and galeries and painted windowes, as hath béene told you: in the which they were very much made of by the patron of the said barke and of the passengers, which were many, and went vnto diuers partes with merchandice: some thinges that they saw by the way till they came vnto Chincheo shal be told you in the chapter following.

CHAP. XIIII. They that were determined to go vnto Luzon, doo depart for the cittie of Chincheo: in which voyage they see ma∣ny riuers and townes: and other particular things.

THe Spaniards depart out of the riuer of Canton, & after they had sailed by sea y^e space of three leagues, they entred into another mighty riuer, in y^e which they trauelled four daies. And sure the great number of citties and townes that they saw alongst the riuers side is incredible, and so nigh the one vnto the other, that they séemed to be al one so in the end of foure dayes they landed at one of the cities, where came so much people to sée those strangers, that it séemed al the kingdom were there as∣sembled togither, & were so many in number, that before they could get to y^e Inne wheras they should be lodged, there passed more then foure houres, and was in distance but a quarter of a league: but when they came thither they were verie faint with the great thrust a••d throng of the people. They stayed in this Cittie one day, and the next day very early in the morning was brought vnto them horse, for to trauel by land other two daies, y^e which was almost continually in villages & townes, & the third day they were imbarked in a small barke, wherein they passed a riuer which had but litle water, y^e space of two houres, thē after

they were shipped in a bigger barke, and entred into another riuer, which seemed to be an arme of the sea, in the which they sailed fiue dayes, and sawe sailing vp and downe the said riuer so many barks and boats, that it made them to be greatly ama∣sed. These riuers were as wel replenished of cities and townes, as the other riuer whereof we haue spoken. Al which is a helpe to beleeue that which hath béene said of the mightinesse, and the great number of people that are in that mighty kingdom. Con∣cluding this riuer they entred into another, but not so broade as the last, but a swifter current, and beset with mightie trées both on the one side and the other, and were so thick that almost they could not sée the sunne thorough them: and although the country very asper there alongst the riuers side, yet was there many walled citties, & an infinite number of townes and vila∣ges, in such sort that the suburbs did almost ioyne the one vnto the other. So when they were disembarked out of this riuer, they trauelled by land other foure dayes, and greatly maruelled to see the great fertilitie of the country, and many other things more, which they do passe ouer, for that in the relation of y^e Au∣gustine friers it hath béene declared vnto you. In the ende of those foure daies they came to a cittie ten leagues from Chi••∣cheo, and were lodged in the suburbs of the same, whether re∣sorted so much people to sée them, that although they did shut y^e gates to defend themselues from the prease, yet could they not be disturbed of the entry, for y^t they broke the gates, & climed vp the wals & windowes to sée them. The host of the house where as they were lodged, when he saw that the people did spoile and distroy his house, he requested the Spaniards to go forth into a greene fielde which was there harde by, placed amongst a com∣pany of Orchards, the which they did to satisfie him, & also to sa∣tisfie the multitude of people that were come thither only to sée them. The noise of the people was so great, that the gouernor feared there had bin some other matter, & commanded a Iudge to go & examine the cause and know the truth: but when that hee was certified thereof, hee commaunded the Spaniards to come vnto his house, for that hee was desirous and would sée them. They presently did accomplish his commandement, and went their way, and as they passed thorough the stréete, there were certaine representing a comedie, but so soone as

the people that were there did sée the Spaniardes they left the players all alone and followed them. They entred into the go∣uernors house, and found him with great maiestie of seruants and souldiers of his gard: he entertayned them with great loue, and asked them who they were, and from whence they came. The interpreter presently shewed the prouision they brought from the viceroy, which was in summe, their licence giuen by him for them to go vnto Chincheo, and that none should di∣sturbe them in their iourney. But to ayde and giue them all fa∣uor possible & that which was néedefull for their iourney. And when that he had read the same, he saide that thereby he did vn∣derstand that which he desired to know, & how that the viceroy did command all gouernors, & him as one of them, they should offer to do all that lay in them: the which he did accomplish and shewed them great fauour and friendship.

The dext day following, they departed out of this citie by land, being giuen vnto them by the gouernor, very good proui∣sion for the way. The same day they came vnto a towne that was very fresh, and fiue leagues from the place they departed, there they determined to tarrie all that night, fearing y^e passage through a citie which was but a league before, suspecting that they should be as much troubled with the people as they were in the other citie the day before. And although this was but a small towne, yet was there so great a concourse of people that came from the villages there abouts, that it caused them to de∣part the next morning more early than they thought, and all the night they could not sléepe, because of the great noyse of the people.

So within a while after they departed from that towne, they came vnto the citie aforesaide, the which for situation and gal∣lant buildings, was the fairest in all that prouince. Through the midst thereof ranne a mightie riuer, ouer the which were many bridges very great and most faire. Here were they so op∣pressed with much people that came to sée them, that they were detayned in the presse a good while before they could enter into the citie: and after they were within they were compassed a∣bout in such sort, that they could not goe to seeke to eate, but were constrained to enter into a barke and go downe the riuer and shroud themselues amongst a company of trées, & although

they did vse this policie. Yet the number of people were so great that leapt into the same barke that they were readie to sinke, till such time as they that had entred the barke, to auoid that perill, returned and lept a shoore, leauing them all alone with the barkemen and marriners that did rowe, who went to seeke and bring them to eate, and they remained in the barke all that night.

So the next day in the morning, before the people could come to disturbe them, they rowed towards the great and huge citie of Chincheo, and entred into the same vppon a sunday in the morning being the sixt day of December.

They remained still in the barke for their owne quietnesse and security, and sent their interpreter with their prouision vn∣to the Gouernour, that he might ordaine at his pleasure that which was therein commanded. The Gouernor when he had receiued commission he said vnto the interpreter that he should tell the Spaniards that he was very glad that they were come thither in safetie and in good health, and that hee should receiue great ioy to sée them, and to shew them the courtesie that was commanded him by the viceroy, in their prouision or commissi∣on. But by reason that the great number of people that would come to sée them, should not be troublesome vnto thē, he would passe ouer h••s content in séeing them, & for their better cōmodi∣tie they shall depart in the same barke wherein they came, vnto the port of Aytim, wheras were certain ships that were bound vnto Luzon, and that he would command they should be recei∣ued into the said ships, and to be carried with as much spéede as was poss••ble: and for the accomplishing of the same hee kept the commission of the viceroy, and gaue an other commission vnto the gouernor of the port whether as hee sent them, in the which he cōmanded to be accomplished all that he had promised.

The Spaniards, although they would very gladly haue séene the citie of Chincheo and the mightinesse thereof, yet did they accomplish that which the gouernor did cōmand without anie reply, for that they considered that it should come then better to passe. So they came vnto the said port the next day folowing in the morning, whereas they did remaine in the barke, doing as they did at Chincheo, & sent their interpreter with the com∣mission vnto the gouernor, who presently after he had read the

same, sent & cōmanded that the Spaniards should come a shore and come and sée him: who did accomplish the same although with no lesse trouble than in other places, by reason of the peo∣ple that came to sée them. The gouernor intertained them with great loue and faire words, and before they departed from him, he sent to call a captaine of one of the ships y^t was there bound vnto Luzon and asked of him when he would depart from that place, who answered within ten daies: then the gouernor com∣manded that he should carrie them in his ship and to giue them the best intertainment that was possible, who promised him to accomplish the same, & therwith he tooke his leaue of them, and sent them with the said captaine, who offered them all the fa∣uour & friendship that was requisite. He presently carried them vnto his ship, who after he had shewed thē the whole cōmoditie therof, he made thē a colation or banket with great friendship.

They remained in this port more than fiftéene daies, wheras they suffered very much colde and séeing that the ship wherein they were appointed to go, was not redie, neither any order for them to depart in many daies, considering the great desire they had to be amongst their owne nation, & to take their ease, and hauing knowledge of an other ship that was ready & would de∣part, they altogither went vnto the gouernor (who was set in audience) & said vnto him with a loud voice (as is vsed in al that countrie) y^t the captaine whom he had cōmanded to carrie them vnto Luzon, was not readie to depart, neither any signe that he would in many daies, & that he would giue them licence and command a captaine of an other ship that was there readie to depart, and went vnto the same Iland of Luzon, that he might carrie thē, because they were so ill at ease, and suffered so much colde that they felt great griefe.

When the Gouernor heard this he was very angry, & with great choler he commaunded one of his officers that was there with him, to go presently & bring before him that captaine vnto whom he had cōmitted the carriage of the Spaniards: y^t which was accomplished and that in so short time, that it caused great wonder: who when he came before the gouernor, had so great feare, that he knew not whether he was in heauen or in earth. The gouernor straighwaies asked him what was the occasion that he did not depart within the tenne daies as he had sayde.

The Captaine answered, that they had had no wether, nei∣ther at that present wherewith they might nauigate. He asked him againe and saide, séeing that the weather and time would not serue, how is it that there is an other ship readie to depart. The captaine at this demand did faulter in his spéech, and an∣swered friuolous wordes, wherefore the Gouernor comman∣ded that he should be whipped in his presence, for the lie which he had tolde, and as they were pulling off his apparell for to ex∣ecute the commandement, the Spaniards hauing pitie & com∣passion of him, for that he séemed to be an honest man, they fell all vpon their knées at the gouernors féete, and requested him to pardon his offence, who did presently consent therunto with a good will, and commanded to let him alone, but he spake vn∣to him very sharpe wordes, such as so farre foorth as the Spa∣niardes could perceiue by the semblance both of the one and of the other, that was as much griefe vnto him as though he had béene whipped. Then presently he commanded to call the cap∣taine of that ship that was readie to depart, and deliuered vn∣to him the commission that he had giuen vnto the other, with a great penaltie, and charged him to carrie the Spaniards vnto the Ilande of Luzon, and charged him to bring a testimoniall from thence, how that he had carried them in very good order and in saftie and left them at the place that they desired. This Captaine vnderstanding what had passed with the other, and because he would not sée himselfe in the like perplexitie, did ac∣cept the commandement, and thought the time long of his de∣parture from thence, and did promise them more than they did demand, and made hast to depart ••ut of the hauen, because hee would not be called backe againe.

CHAP. XV. The Spaniardes depart from China and go to Luzon, they do passe some stormes at the sea: the marriners doo call vpon the diuell, by lots: the religious men do reprehend them: in the end they come to their desired port, where∣as they are receiued with much ioy.

THe second day of Ianuarie departed out of the port of Ay∣tim with a prosperous wind the shippe wherein was im∣barked

the Spaniardes, and two other which were their safe conduct: but by reason it was winter, the faire winde indured but a while, yet came they that day vnto the Ilande of Amoy, which was sixe leagues from the firme lande, and there they stayed one day. The next day following they went to sea, to prosecute their voyage, whereas they were taken with so ter∣rible and foule weather, that the ship did driue they knew not whither, and many times in daunger to be drowned. This storme indured four dayes although more stronger at one time than at an other: in the which storme was separated the thrée ships the one from the other, in such sort that euerie one tooke his way, procuring to saue themselues, as commonly in such cases is vsed, without hauing any care the one of the other, and God was so pleased that the ship wherin the Spaniards were, and one of the other two entred into a sure port, although with great trouble and with so great a leake, that they could scarce kéepe her aboue water: but in especiall that which came in their safe conduct. And afterwarde they vnderstood that the o∣ther ship had taken port fiftie leagues from that place with the like perill and danger. In this port they remained certaine dayes trimming their ships and tarrying for a faire winde. So they departed from thence the thrée and twentie day of Ianua∣rie and to their iudgementes with a setled and good winde, with the which they sayled fiue dayes, in the end wherof they disco∣uered the Iland of Luzon, with a singular ioy vnto them all, for the which the Spaniards gaue thankes vnto God, by whose fauour they had escaped the storme past.

But it so fell out, as they were going alongest the coast of the Iland for to enter into the port of Manilla, and being with∣in fiue leagues of the entrie thereof, vpon a soddaine there arose the north wind with so great furie, and caused so great a sea, that they found themselues in a great deale more danger than in the other storme past, in such sort that they sponed before the winde with their foresayle halfe mast hie, shaking it selfe all to péeces, and in euerie minute of an houre readie to be drow∣ned. The Chinos for that they are superstitious and witches, beganne to inuocate and call vpon the diuell, for to bring them out of that trouble (which is a thing commonly vsed amongest them, at all times when they finde themselues in the like per∣plexitie)

also they doo request of him to showe them what they should doo to bring themselues out of trouble.

But when the Spaniards vnderstoode their dealinges, they did disturbe them that they shoulde not perseuer in their lottes and inuocations, and beganne to coniure the diuelles, which was the occasion that they would not answere vnto the inuo∣cation of the Chinos, who did call them after diuerse man∣ners (as hath béene declared in the first part of this historie) yet they heard a diuell saye, that they should not blame them because they did not answere vnto their demaunde, for they could not doo it for that they were disturbed by the coniura∣tion of those sp••nish Fathers which they carried with them in their shippe.

So presently when the night was come God was so pleased that the storme ceased, and became in fewe houres very calme, although it indured but a while, for as they beganne to set sayle to nauigate towardes the port, and almost at the point to enter into the same a newe storme seised on them, and with so great force, that they were constrayned to returne vnto the sea, for feare to be broken in péeces vpon the shore.

At this time they wanted both water and victualles which was vnto them a newe torment, & they were brought into so great extremitie, that for ninetie and sixe persons that were in the shippe, there was not left victuals for two dayes.

The Chinos beganne a newe to inuocate the diuels by wri∣ting, which is a way that they neuer let but doo answere them, as they did at this instant, and were not disturbed by the con∣iurations of the fathers, yet notwithstanding they lyed in their answere, for that they saide that within thrée dayes they should be within the citie of Manilla, and after it was more then four dayes.

In conclusion hauing by the fauour of almightie God ouer∣come all their trauayles by the sea, and the necessitie of the lacke of water and victualles, they ariued at the desired port the second day of Februarie Anno 1580. whereas they were receiued by the gouernour and of all the rest with great ioy, in pardoning them the offence they had committed in going with∣out licence, and showed vnto them particular fauours, & were very sorrowfull that the father Costodio and his companions

remained in Machao, for that hee was welbeloued of all, and that with great desert, for his vnderstanding, learning, & holy life. Who within fewe dayes after did write a letter vnto the rest of the religious men in Manilla aduertising them how that in a short time they came vnto Machao in good health, & how that the bishoppe and the Captaine generall with all the rest of the towne were verie glad and ioyfull of their comming, and fully resolued to the contrarie of the false opinion that they had conceiued of them, and that he was in g••••at hope to sée his de∣sire accomplished, for that he was daily in place wheras they did sée & comon with the Chinos, whom, so soone as he can speake y^e language, he doth pretend to instruct them in ma••ters touching the faith. Also he wrote, that he vnderstood by good originall or information (although it was cōmitted in secret) that the king∣dom or prouince of Cochin China, which is four daies iourney from Machao, whereas the Portingals hath contraction, and port for all their ships that come from the Indias, hath sent vnto the bishop of Machao, & doth demand of him priests for to baptise them, with such determination & good will to be christi∣ans, that in some portes they haue alreadie timber cut downe for to edifie churches. This you may beléeue for that the bishop himselfe hath tolde him, and in the latter end of his letter was written as foloweth. They haue inuited me to this enterprise, and (for to put my selfe therein) I would gladly haue with me many companions, which is the treasure that we go to séeke. It is a firme lande, there whereas God hath prepared a great haruest. Th••y are politike people and more easie to be conuer∣ted then the Chinos, for that the diuell hath not put so ma∣nie disturbances against the gospell of Christ, as in China, al∣though it doth ioyne vpon it, and once entring the faith there∣in, with the fauour of God, their great & difficult doings which now they haue among them will be broken with great ease, for they are not so many nor so great, whereby wee should be dis∣comforted to sée thē ouercome, and principally they being men of so good wisedome and vnderstanding, as we haue séene by ex∣perience in the time that we haue béene amongest them, and so full of mercie and pitie, that although wee entred into the lande without licence, and for dooing of the same wee ranne in great daunger of our owne liues, they did intreat vs well,

and gaue vs all that was néedefull, and also did suffer vs to preach, if we could the language: the which with the fauour of God we will quickly learne, for that we are whereas continu∣ally we doo common and talke with the Chinos, wee doo verie earnestly commit it vnto our Lord to direct and guide the same, that his holy name may bee exalted, and the soules of these blinde Gentiles may knowe and beléeue, and beléeuing may be saued.

This was the substance of the letter, with the which it sée∣meth vnto vnto me great reason to conclude this second relati∣on. And to begin the third, the which I do beléeue will be plea∣sant to the reader, and is intituled, A Commentarie of the new world, in the which is contayned many curious matters, as you shall perceiue after the reading thereof, and is declared in substance and effect by the relation of the father, that did passe and sée them all, who was named fryer Martin Ignacio, a religious man of the order of S. Francis, who after that he had compassed the whole worlde, came hither to Rome with Martin Simion bishop of the Iland of Pepper in the orientall or east Indias, with whom I haue had communication diuers times, and is a Chalde borne, and of the citie of Niniuie in Ba∣bylon, and made bishop by the patriarke of Babylon.

The end of this booke.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Where Lima∣hon was born••.
• * 1.2

  One rouer robbed an other.
• * 1.3

  One hundred and thirtie great ships of warre with fortie thou∣sand men.
• * 1.4

  They do more est••eme hono•• than losse of ships or men.
• * 1.5

  A good praise of others.
• * 1.6

  The captaine generall of the king of China.
• * 1.7

  Omoncon promiseth to carrie the friers vnto China.
• * 1.8

  A good pre∣tence.
• * 1.9

  The Friers names that wēt to China.
• * 1.10

  A token that fine cloath is esteemed.
• * 1.11

  They depar∣ted towards China.
• * 1.12

  Their com∣passes diui∣ded into 12. parts.
• * 1.13

  They leaue the worshi∣ping of one Idol to wor∣ship another.
• * 1.14

  They call the Spaniards Castillias.
• * 1.15

  Ensignes to knowe the Iustices.
• * 1.16

  ••e first lan∣••ing of the Fryers.
• * 1.17

  The vse of their bankets
• * 1.18

  Wine of a palme tree.
• * 1.19

  A thing to keepe away the sunne.
• * 1.20

  The people of the countrie weare no weapons, but the souldiers.
• * 1.21

  Chincheo hath seuentie thousand housholds.
• * 1.22

  A thousand ships in one riuer.
• * 1.23

  They haue no vse of castles.
• * 1.24

  Earth quaks in this coun∣trey.
• * 1.25

  Rich mar∣chandice.
• * 1.26

  Triumphant arches.
• * 1.27

  Great mai••∣stie.
• * 1.28

  He offered 500. shippes of warre,
• * 1.29

  Note the spaniards ••nsolencie.
• * 1.30

  A citie of three hundred thousand housholds.
• * 1.31

  A city bigger thē the other, and requireth three daies to go from one gate to an o∣ther.

  Seuentie leagues com∣passe.
• * 1.32

  The wall of the Citie is fiue fadam high & four•• broad.
• * 1.33

  The citie double moo∣ted.
• * 1.34

  A strange ••eremonie.
• * 1.35

  Comedies v∣sed amongest them.
• * 1.36

  Tomblers.
• * 1.37

  The argu∣ment of the•••• comedie.
• * 1.38

  All things good cheape.
• * 1.39

  111. Idols in one chap∣pell.
• * 1.40

  People in great subiec∣••ion.
• * 1.41

  Suspition of euill.
• * 1.42

  The vse of their muste∣ring.
• * 1.43

  Souldiers are punished.
• * 1.44

  Their muste∣ring is one throughout the whole kingdome.
• * 1.45

  Superstitiō.
• * 1.46

  To keepe a∣way the sun.
• * 1.47

  S••range sa∣crifices.
• * 1.48

  Mine kine and horse.
• * 1.49

  The Chinos are fearefull of the sea.
• * 1.50

  From the Philippinas to the China is two hun∣dred leagues.
• * 1.51

  The papists and ••h•• In∣fidels ••ere∣moni••s much alike▪
• * 1.52

  The Spani∣ards rise at thei midnight mattens and whip them∣selues.
• * 1.53

  They were in great perill
• * 1.54

  The Friers vsed certaine coniurations for that S. Antonie was a sleepe.
• * 1.55

  Marke the Friers con••fession of Images.
• * 1.56

  The Chinos most vpright in all their iudgements and in execu∣tion of iustice
• * 1.57

  The vizroies commission.
• * 1.58

  A sacred thing no doubt of it.
• * 1.59

  A prophesie.